Abstract
The asymptotic safety scenario in quantum gravity is reviewed, according to which a renormalizable quantum theory of the gravitational field is feasible which reconciles asymptotically safe couplings with unitarity. The evidence from symmetry truncations and from the truncated flow of the effective average action is presented in detail. A dimensional reduction phenomenon for the residual interactions in the extreme ultraviolet links both results. For practical reasons the background effective action is used as the central object in the quantum theory. In terms of it criteria for a continuum limit are formulated and the notion of a background geometry selfconsistently determined by the quantum dynamics is presented. Selfcontained appendices provide prerequisites on the background effective action, the effective average action, and their respective renormalization flows.
Similar content being viewed by others
Avoid common mistakes on your manuscript.
1 Introduction and Survey
The search for a physically viable theory of quantized gravitation is ongoing; in part because the physics it ought to describe is unknown, and in part because different approaches may not ‘approach’ the same physics. The most prominent contenders are string theory and loop quantum gravity, with ample literature available on either sides. For booksized expositions see for example [97, 177, 112, 199]. The present report and [157] describe a circle of ideas which differ in several important ways from these approaches.
1.1 Survey of the scenario
First, the gravitational field itself is taken seriously as the prime carrier of the relevant classical and quantum degrees of freedom. Second, a physics premise (“antiscreening”) is made about the selfinteraction of these quantum degrees of freedom in the ultraviolet. Third, the effective diminution of the relevant degrees of freedom in the ultraviolet (on which morally speaking all approaches agree) is interpreted as universality in the statistical physics sense in the vicinity of an ultraviolet renormalization group fixed point. The resulting picture of microscopic geometry is fractallike with a local dimensionality of two.
The concrete implementation of these ideas has begun only recently and led to a number of surprising results to be reviewed here. Part of the physics intuition, on the other hand, dates back to an 1979 article by Weinberg [227] (see also [94]). Motivated by the analogy to the asymptotic freedom property of nonAbelian gauge theories, the term “asymptotic safety” was suggested in [227], indicating that physical quantities are “safe” from divergencies as the cutoff is removed. Following this suggestion we shall refer to the above circle of ideas as the “asymptotic safety scenario” for quantum gravity. For convenient orientation we display the main features of the asymptotic safety scenario in an overview:

Relate micro and macrophysics of the gravitational field through a renormalization flow.

As the basic physics premise stipulate that the physical degrees of freedom in the extreme ultraviolet interact predominantly antiscreening.

Based on this premise benign renormalization properties in the ultraviolet are plausible. The resulting “Quantum Gravidynamics” can then be viewed as a peculiar quasirenormalizable field theory based on a nonGaussian fixed point.

In the extreme ultraviolet the residual interactions appear twodimensional.
This is a setting which places quantum gravity within the framework of known physics principles. It is not presupposed that continuous fields or distributions on a four dimensional manifold are necessarily the most adequate description in the extreme ultraviolet. However, since these evidently provide the correct dynamical degrees of freedom at ‘low’ (sub TeV) energies, a research strategy which focuses on the ‘backtracing’ of the origin of these dynamical degrees of freedom via renormalization group ideas seems most appropriate.
This amounts to a strategy centered around a functional integral picture, which was indeed the strategy adopted early on [144, 78], but which is now mostly abandoned. A functional integral over geometries of course has to differ in several crucial ways from one for fields on a fixed geometry. This led to the development of several formulations (canonical, covariant [64, 65, 66], proper time [212, 213], and covariant Euclidean [104, 92]). As is wellknown the functional integral picture is also beset by severe technical problems [210, 63]. Nevertheless this should not distract attention from the fact that a functional integral picture has a physics content which differs from the physics content of other approaches. For want of a better formulation we shall refer to this fact by saying that a functional integral picture “takes the degrees of freedom of the gravitational field seriously also in the quantum regime”.
Let us briefly elaborate on that. Arguably the cleanest intuition to ‘what quantizing gravity might mean’ comes from the functional integral picture. Transition or scattering amplitudes for nongravitational processes should be affected not only by one geometry solving the gravitational field equations, but by a ‘weighted superposition’ of ‘nearby possible’ offshell geometries. The rationale behind this intuition is that all known (microscopic) matter is quantized that way, and using an offshell matter configuration as the source of the Einstein field equations is in general inconsistent, unless the geometry is likewise offshell. Moreover, relativistic quantum field theory suggests that the mattergeometry coupling is effected not only through averaged or large scale properties of matter. For example nonvanishing connected correlators of a matter energy momentum tensor should be a legitimate source of gravitational radiation as well (see [81]). Of course this does not tell in which sense the geometry is offshell, nor which class of possible geometries ought to be considered and be weighed with respect to which measure. Rapid decoherence, a counterpart of spontaneous symmetry breaking, and other unknown mechanisms may in addition mask the effects of the superposition principle. Nevertheless the argument suggests that the degrees of freedom of the gravitational field should be taken seriously also in the quantum regime, roughly along the lines of a functional integral.
Doing so one has to face the before mentioned enormous difficulties. Nevertheless facing these problems and maintaining the credible physics premise of a functional integral picture is, in our view, more appropriate than evading the problems in exchange for a less credible physics premise. Of course in the absence of empirical guidance the ‘true’ physics of quantum gravity is unknown; so for the time being it will be important to try to isolate differences in the physics content of the various approaches. By physics content we mean here qualitative or quantitative results for the values of “quantum gravity corrections” to generic physical quantities in the approach considered. Generic physical quantities should be such that they in principle capture the entire invariant content of a theory. In a conventional field theory Smatrix elements by and large have this property, in canonical general relativity Dirac observables play this role [9, 219, 70]. In quantum gravity, in contrast, no agreement has been reached on the nature of such generic physical quantities.
Quantum gravity research strongly draws on concepts and techniques from other areas of theoretical physics. As these concepts and techniques evolve they are routinely applied to quantum gravity. In the case of the functional integral picture the transferral was in the past often dismissed as eventually inappropriate. As the concepts and techniques evolved further, the reasons for the original dismissal may have become obsolete but the negative opinion remained. We share the viewpoint expressed by Wilczek in [230]: “Whether the next big step will require a sharp break from the principles of quantum field theory, or, like the previous ones, a better appreciation of its potentialities, remains to be seen”. As a first (small) step one can try to reassess the prospects of a functional integral picture for the description of the quantized gravitational field, which is what we set out to do here. We try to center the discussion around the above main ideas, and, for short, call a quantum theory of gravity based on them Quantum Gravidynamics. For the remainder of Section 1.1 we now discuss a number of key issues that arise.
In any functional integral picture one has to face the crucial renormalizability problem. Throughout we shall be concerned exclusively with (non)renormalizability in the ultraviolet. The perspective on the nature of the impasse entailed by the perturbative nonrenormalizability of the EinsteinHilbert action (see Bern [30] for a recent review), however, has changed significantly since the time it was discovered by ’t Hooft and Veltmann [210]. First, the effective field theory framework applied to quantum gravity (see [50] for a recent review) provides unambiguous answers for ‘low energy’ quantities despite the perturbative nonrenormalizability of the ‘fundamental’ action. The role of an apriori microscopic action is moreover strongly deemphasized when a KadanoffWilson view on renormalization is adopted. We shall give a quick reminder on this framework in Appendix A. Applied to gravity it means that the EinsteinHilbert action should not be considered as the microscopic (high energy) action, rather the (nonperturbatively defined) renormalization flow itself will dictate, to a certain extent, which microscopic action to use and whether or not there is a useful description of the extreme ultraviolet regime in terms of ‘fundamental’ (perhaps nonmetric) degrees of freedom. The extent to which this is true hinges on the existence of a fixed point with a renormalized trajectory emanating from it. The fixed point guarantees universality in the statistical physics sense. If there is a fixed point, any action on a renormalized trajectory describes identically the same physics on all energy scales lower than the one where it is defined. Following the trajectory back (almost) into the fixed point one can in principle extract unambiguous answers for physical quantities on all energy scales.
Compared to the effective field theory framework the main advantage lies not primarily in the gained energy range in which reliable computations can be made, but rather that one has a chance to properly identify ‘large’ quantum gravity effects at low energies. Indeed the (presently known) low energy effects that arise in the effective field theory framework, although unambiguously defined, are suppressed by the powers of energy scale/Planck mass one would expect on dimensional grounds. Conversely, if there are detectable low energy imprints of quantum gravity they presumably arise from high energy (Planck scale) processes, in which case one has to computationally propagate their effect through many orders of magnitudes down to accessible energies.
This may be seen as the the challenge a physically viable theory of quantum gravity has to meet, while the nature of the ‘fundamental’ degrees of freedom is of secondary importance. Indeed, from the viewpoint of renormalization theory it is the universality class that matters, not the particular choice of dynamical variables. Once a functional integral picture has been adopted, even nonlocally and nonlinearly related sets of fields or other variables may describe the same universality class — and hence the same physics.
The arena on which the renormalization group acts is a space of actions or, equivalently, a space of measures. A typical action has the form ∑_{α} u_{α}P_{α}, where P_{α} are interaction monomials (including kinetic terms) and the u_{α} are scale dependent coefficients. The subset u_{i} which cannot be removed by field redefinitions are called essential parameters, or couplings. Usually one makes them dimensionless by taking out a suitable power of the scale parameter μ, \({g_i}(\mu) = {\mu ^{ {d_i}}}{u_i}(\mu)\). In the following the term “essential coupling” will always refer to these dimensionless variants. We also presuppose the principles according to which a (WilsonKadanoff) renormalization flow is defined on this area. For the convenience of the reader a brief reminder is included in Appendix A. In the context of Quantum Gravidynamics some key notions (unstable manifold and continuum limit) have a somewhat different status which we outline below.
Initially all concepts in a WilsonKadanoff renormalization procedure refer to a choice of coarse graining operation. It is part of the physics premise of a functional integral type approach that there is a description independent and physically relevant distinction between coarse grained and fine grained geometries. On a classical level this amounts to the distinction, for example, between a perfect fluid solution of the field equations and one generated by its 10^{30} or so molecular constituents. A sufficiently large set of Dirac observables would be able to discriminate two such spacetimes. Whenever we shall refer later on to “coarse grained” versus “fine grained” geometries we have a similar picture in mind for the ensembles of offshell geometries entering a functional integral.
With respect to a given coarse graining operation one can ask whether the flow of actions or couplings has a fixed point. The existence of a fixed point is the raison d’être for the universality properties (in the statistical field theory sense) which eventually are ‘handed down’ to the physics in the low energy regime. By analogy with other field theoretical systems one should probably not expect that the existence (or nonexistence) of a (nonGaussian) fixed point will be proven with mathematical rigor in the near future. From a physics viewpoint, however, it is the high degree of universality ensued by a fixed point that matters, rather than the existence in the mathematical sense. For example nonAbelian gauge theories appear to have a (Gaussian) fixed point ‘for all practical purposes’, while their rigorous construction as the continuum limit of a lattice theory is still deemed a ‘millennium problem’. In the case of quantum gravity we shall present in Sections 3 and 4 in detail two new pieces of evidence for the existence of a (nonGaussian) fixed point.
Accepting the existence of a (nonGaussian) fixed point as a working hypothesis one is led to determine the structure of its unstable manifold. Given a coarse graining operation and a fixed point of it, the stable (unstable) manifold is the set of all points connected to the fixed point by a coarse graining trajectory terminating at it (emanating from it). It is not guaranteed though that the space of actions can in the vicinity of the fixed point be divided into a stable and an unstable manifold; there may be trajectories which develop singularities or enter a region of coupling space deemed unphysical for other reasons and thus remain unconnected to the fixed point. The stable manifold is the innocuous part of the problem; it is the unstable manifold which is crucial for the construction of a continuum limit. By definition it is swept out by flow lines emanating from the fixed point, the socalled renormalized trajectories. Points on such a flow line correspond to actions or measures which are called perfect in that they can be used to compute continuum answers for physical quantities even in the presence of an ultraviolet (UV) cutoff, like one which discretizes the base manifold. In practice the unstable manifold is not known and renormalized trajectories have to be identified approximately by a tuning process. What is easy to determine is whether in a given expansion “sum over coupling times interaction monomial” a coupling will be driven away from the value the corresponding coordinate has at the fixed point after a sufficient number of coarse graining steps (in which case it is called relevant) or will move towards this fixed point value (in which case it is called irrelevant). Note that this question can be asked even for trajectories which are not connected to the fixed point. The dimension of the unstable manifold equals the number of independent relevant interaction monomials that are ‘connected’ to the fixed point by a (renormalized) trajectory.
Typically the unstable manifold is indeed locally a manifold, though it may have cusps. Although ultimately it is only the unstable manifold that matters for the construction of a continuum limit, relevant couplings which blow up somewhere in between may make it very difficult to successfully identify the unstable manifold. In practice, if the basis of interaction monomials in which this happens is deemed natural and a change of basis in which the pathological directions could simply be omitted from the space of actions is very complicated, the problems caused by such a blow up may be severe. An important issue in practice is therefore whether in a natural basis of interaction monomials the couplings are ‘safe’ from such pathologies and the space of actions decomposes in the vicinity of the fixed point neatly into a stable and an unstable manifold. This regularity property is one aspect of “asymptotic safety”, as we shall see below.
A second caveat appears in infinitedimensional situations. Whenever the coarse graining operates on an infinite set of potentially relevant interaction monomials, convergence issues in the infinite sums formed from them may render formally equivalent bases inequivalent. In this case the geometric picture of a (coordinate independent) manifold breaks down or has to be replaced by a more refined functional analytic framework. An example of a field theory with an infinite set of relevant interaction monomials is QCD in a lightfront formulation [174] where manifest Lorentz and gauge invariance is given up in exchange of other advantages. In this case it is thought that there are hidden dependencies among the associated couplings so that the number of independent relevant couplings is finite and the theory is eventually equivalent to conventional QCD. Such a reduction of couplings is nontrivial because a relation among couplings has to be preserved under the renormalization flow. In quantum gravity related issues arise to which we turn later.
As an interlude let us outline the role of Newton’s constant in a diffeomorphism invariant theory with a dynamical metric. Let S[g, matter] be any local action, where g = (g_{αβ})_{1≤α,β≤d} is the metric and the “matter” fields are not scaled when the metric is. Constant rescalings of the metric then give rise to a variation of the Lagrangian which vanishes on a shell:
As a consequence one of the coupling parameters which in the absence of gravity would be essential (i.e. a genuine coupling) becomes inessential (i.e. can be changed at will by a redefinition of the fields). The running of this parameter, like that of a wave function renormalization constant, has no direct significance. If the pure gravity part contains the usual Ricci scalar term \(\sqrt g R(g)\), the parameter that becomes inessential may be taken as its prefactor Z_{N}. Up to a dimension dependent coefficient it can be identified with the inverse of Newton’s constant \(Z_{\rm{N}}^{ 1}\sim{G_{{\rm{Newton}}}}\), the latter defined through the nonrelativistic force law. It is also easy to see that in a background field formalism ω sets the overall normalization of the spectral/momentum values. Hence in a theory with a dynamical metric the three (conceptually distinct) inessential parameters — overall scale of the metric, the inverse of Newton’s constant, and the overall normalization of the spectral/momentum values — are in onetoone correspondence (see Section 2.3.1 for details). For definiteness let us consider the running of Newton’s constant here.
Being inessential, the quantum field theoretical running of G_{Newton} has significance only relative to the running coefficient of some reference operator. The most commonly used choice is a cosmological constant term \(\Lambda \int {dx\sqrt g}\). Indeed
is dimensionless and invariant under constant rescalings of the metric [116]. The associated essential coupling τ(μ) is in the present context assumed to be asymptotically safe, i.e. \(\sum\nolimits_{{\mu _0} \leq \mu \leq \infty}\tau (\mu) < \infty\), lim_{μ→∞} τ(μ) = τ_{*}, where here 0 < τ_{*} < ∞. Factorizing it into the dimensionless Newton constant g_{N} ∼ μ^{d−2}G_{Newton} and λ(μ) = 2μ^{d}g_{N}(μ)Λ, there are two possibilities: One is that the scheme choices are such that both g_{N} and λ behave like asymptotically safe couplings, i.e. satisfy Equation (1.3) below. This is advantageous for most purposes. The second possibility is realized when a singular solution for the flow equation for g_{N} is inserted into the flow equation for λ. This naturally occurs when G_{Newton}, viewed as an inessential parameter, is frozen at a prescribed value, say [G_{Newton}]^{1/(d−2)} = M_{P1} ≈ 1.4 × 10^{19} GeV, which amounts to working with Planck units [172]. Then the g_{N} flow is trivial, g_{N}(μ) ∼ (μ/M_{P1})^{d−2}, but the flow equation for λ carries an explicit μdependence. By and large both formulations are mathematically equivalent (see Section 2.3.1). For definiteness we considered here the cosmological constant term as a reference operator, but many other choices are possible. In summary, the dimensionless Newton constant can be treated either as an inessential parameter (and then frozen to a constant value) or as a quasiessential coupling (in which case it runs and assumes a finite positive asymptotic value).
The unstable manifold of a fixed point is crucial for the construction of a continuum limit. The fixed point itself describes a strictly scale invariant situation. More precisely the situation at the fixed point is by definition invariant under the chosen coarse graining (i.e. scale changing) operation. In particular any dependence on an ultraviolet cutoff must drop out at the fixed point, which is why fixed points are believed to be indispensable for the construction of a scaling limit. If one now uses a different coarse graining operation the location of the fixed point will change in the given coordinate system provided by the essential couplings. One aspect of universality is that all field theories based on the fixed points referring to different coarse graining operations have the same long distance behavior.
This suggests to introduce the notion of a continuum limit as an ‘equivalence class’ of scaling limits in which the physical quantities become independent of the UV cutoff, largely independent of the choice of the coarse graining operation, and, ideally, invariant under local reparameterizations of the fields.
In the framework of statistical field theories one distinguishes between two construction principles, a massless scaling limit and a massive scaling limit. In the first case all the actions/measures on a trajectory emanating from the fixed point describe a scale invariant system, in the second case this is true only for the action/measure at the fixed point. In either case the unstable manifold of the given fixed point has to be at least onedimensional. Here we shall exclusively be interested in the second construction principle. Given a coarse graining operation and a fixed point of it with a nontrivial unstable manifold a scaling limit is then constructed by ‘backtracing’ a renormalized trajectory emanating from the fixed point. The number of parameters needed to specify a point on the unstable manifold gives the number of possible scaling limits — not all of which must be physically distinct, however.
In this context it should be emphasized that the number of relevant directions in a chosen basis is not directly related to the predictive power of the theory. A number of authors have argued in the effective field theory framework that even theories with an infinite number of relevant parameters can be predictive [126, 16, 32]. This applies all the more if the theory under consideration is based on a fixed point, and thus not merely effective. One reason lies in the fact that the number of independent relevant directions connected to the fixed point might not be known. Hidden dependencies would then allow for a (genuine or effective) reduction of couplings [236, 160, 174, 11, 16]. For quantum gravity the situation is further complicated by the fact that generic physical quantities are likely to be related only nonlocally and nonlinearly to the metric. What matters for the predictive power is not the total number of relevant parameters but how the observables depend on them. To illustrate the point imagine a (hypothetical) case where n^{2} observables are injective functions of n relevant couplings each; then n measurements will determine the couplings, leaving n^{2} − n predictions. This gives plenty of predictions, for any n, and it remains true in the limit n → ∞, despite the fact that one then has infinitely many relevant couplings.
Infinitely many essential couplings naturally arise when a perturbative treatment of Quantum Gravidynamics is based on a 1/p^{2} type propagator. As first advocated by Gomis and Weinberg [94] the use of a 1/p^{2} type graviton propagator in combination with higher derivative terms avoids the problems with unitarity that occur in other treatments of higher derivative theories. Consistency requires that quadratic counterterms (those which contribute to the propagator) can be absorbed by field redefinitions. This can be seen to be the case [10] either in the absence of a cosmological constant term or when the background spacetime admits a metric with constant curvature. The price to pay for the 1/p^{2} type propagator is that all nonquadratic counterterms have to be included in the bare action, so that independence of the UV cutoff can only be achieved with infinitely many essential couplings, but it can be [94]. In order to distinguish this from the familiar notion of perturbative renormalizability with finitely many couplings we shall call such theories (perturbatively) weakly renormalizable. Translated into Wilsonian terminology the above results then show the existence of a “weakly renormalizable” but “propagator unitary” Quantum Gravidynamics based on a perturbative Gaussian fixed point.
The beta functions for this infinite set of couplings are presently unknown. If they were known, expectations are that at least a subset of the couplings would blow up at some finite momentum scale μ = μ_{term} and would be unphysical for μ > μ_{term}. In this case the computed results for physical quantities (“reaction rates”) are likely to blow up likewise at some (high) energy scale μ = μ_{term}.
This illustrates Weinberg’s concept of asymptotic safety. To quote from [227]: “A theory is said to be asymptotically safe if the essential coupling parameters approach a fixed point as the momentum scale of their renormalization point goes to infinity”. Here ‘the’ essential couplings g_{i} are those which are useful for the absorption of cutoff dependencies, i.e. not irrelevant ones. The momentum scale is the above μ, so that the condition amounts to having nonterminating trajectories for the g_{i}’s with a finite limit:
In other words in an asymptotically safe theory the above blowup in the couplings and hence in physical observables does not occur. We suggest to call couplings satisfying Equation (1.3) asymptotically safe. As a specification one should add [227]: “Of course the question whether or not an infinity in coupling constants betokens a singularity in reaction rates depends on how the coupling constants are parameterized. We could always adopt a perverse definition (e.g. \({\rm{\tilde g}}(\mu) = {(g_{\ast} g(\mu))^{ 1}}\)) such that reaction rates are finite even at an infinity of the coupling parameters. This problem can be avoided if we define the coupling constants as coefficients in a power series expansion of the reaction rates themselves around some physical renormalization point”.
A similar remark applies to the signs of coupling constants. When defined through physical quantities certain couplings or coupling combinations will be constrained to be positive. For example in a (nongravitational) effective field theory this constrains the couplings of a set of leading power counting irrelevant operators to be positive [2]. In an asymptotically safe theory similar constraints are expected to arise and are crucial for its physics viability.
Note that whenever the criterion for asymptotic safety is met, all the relevant couplings lie in the unstable manifold of the fixed point (which is called the “UV critical surface” in [227], Page 802, a term now usually reserved for the surface of infinite correlation length). The regularity property described earlier is then satisfied, and the space of actions decomposes in the vicinity of the fixed point into a stable and an unstable manifold.
Comparing the two perturbative treatments of Quantum Gravidynamics described earlier, one sees that they have complementary advantages and disadvantages: Higher derivative theories based on a 1/p^{4} propagator are strictly renormalizable with couplings that are presumed to be asymptotically safe; however unphysical propagating modes are present. Defining higher derivative gravity perturbatively with respect to a 1/p^{2} propagator has the advantage that all propagating modes are physical, but infinitely many essential couplings are needed, a subset of which is presumed to be not asymptotically safe. From a technical viewpoint the challenge of Quantum Gravidynamics lies therefore not so much in achieving renormalizability but to reconcile asymptotically safe couplings with the absence of unphysical propagating modes.
The solution of this ‘technical’ problem is likely also to give rise to enhanced preditability properties, which should be vital to make the theory phenomenologically interesting. Adopting the second of the above perturbative constructions one sees that situation is similar to, for example, perturbative QED. So, apart from esthetic reasons, why not be content with physically motivated couplings that display a ‘Landau’ pole, and hence with an effective field theory description? Predictability in principle need not a be problem. The previous remarks about the predictability of theories with infinitely many essential couplings apply here. Even in Quantum Gravidynamics based on the perturbative Gaussian fixed point, some lowest order corrections are unambiguously defined (independent of the scale μ_{term}), as stressed by Donoghue (see [32] and references therein). In our view [82], as mentioned earlier, the main rationale for trying to go beyond Quantum Gravidynamics based on the perturbative Gaussian fixed point is not the infinite number of essential couplings, but the fact that the size of the corrections is invariably governed by powercounting dimensions. As a consequence, in the energy range where the computations are reliable the corrections are way too small to be phenomenologically interesting. Conversely, if there is a physics of quantum gravity, which is experimentally accessible and adequately described by some Quantum Gravidynamics, the above two features need to be reconciled — perturbatively or nonperturbatively.
Assuming that this can be achieved certain qualitative features such a gravitational functional integral must have can be inferred without actually evaluating it. One is the presence of antiscreening configurations, the other is a dimensional reduction phenomenon in the ultraviolet.
In nonAbelian gauge theories the antiscreening phenomenon can be viewed as the physics mechanism underlying their benign high energy behavior (as opposed to Abelian gauge theories, say); see e.g. [175] for an intuitive discussion. It is important not to identify “antiscreening” with its most widely known manifestation, the sign of the dominant contribution to the oneloop beta function. In an exact continuum formulation of a pure YangMills theory, say, the correlation functions do not even depend on the gauge coupling. Nevertheless they indirectly do know about “asymptotic freedom” through their characteristic high energy behavior. In the functional integral measure this comes about through the dominance of certain configurations/histories which one might also call “antiscreening”.
By analogy one would expect that in a gravitational functional integral which allows for a continuum limit, a similar mechanism is responsible for its benign ultraviolet behavior (as opposed to the one expected by power counting considerations with respect to a 1/p^{2} propagator, say). Some insight into the nature of this mechanism can be gained from a Hamiltonian formulation of the functional integral (authors, unpublished) but a concise characterization of the “antiscreening” geometries/histories, ideally in a discretized setting, remains to be found. By definition the dominance of these configurations/histories would be responsable for the benign ultraviolet properties of the discretized functional integral based on a nonGaussian fixed point. Conversely understanding the nature of these antiscreening geometries/histories might help to design good discretizations. A discretization of the gravitational functional integral which allows for a continuum limit might also turn out to exclude or dynamically disfavor configurations that are taken into account in other, offhand equally plausible, discretizations. Compared to such a naive discretization it will look as if a constraint on the allowed configurations/histories has been imposed. For want of a better term we call this an “antiscreening constraint”. A useful analogy is the inclusion of a causality constraint in the definition of the (formal Euclidean) functional integral originally proposed by Teitelboim [212, 213], and recently put to good use in the framework of dynamical triangulations [5]. Just as the inclusion of a good causality constraint is justified retroactively, so would be the inclusion of a suitable “antiscreening” constraint.
A second qualitative property of a gravitational functional integral where the continuum limit is based on a nonGaussian fixed point is a dimensional reduction of the residual interactions in the UV. There are several arguments for this phenomenon which will be described in Section 2.4. Perhaps the simplest one is based on the large anomalous dimensions at a nonGaussian fixed point and runs as follows: (We present here a formulation independent variant [157] of the argument first used in [133].) Suppose that the unkown microscopic action is local and reparameterization invariant. The only term containing second derivatives then is the familiar EinsteinHilbert term \(\int {dx\sqrt g R(g)}\) of mass dimension 2 − d in d dimensions, if the metric is taken dimensionless. As explained before the dimensionful running prefactor Z_{N} multiplying it plays a double role, once as a wave function renormalization constant and once as a quasiessential coupling g_{N}(μ). Both aspects are related as outlined before; in particular
Here g_{N} is a dimensionless coupling which is treated as “quasiessential” and whose running may also depend on all the other couplings (gravitational and nongravitational) made dimensionless by taking out a suitable power of μ. The short distance behavior of the propagator will now be governed by the “anomalous dimension” η_{N} = −μ∂_{μ}lnZ_{N}(μ), by the usual field theoretical arguments, say, via the CallanSymanzik equation for the effective action. On the other hand the flow equation for g_{N} can be expressed in terms of η_{N} as
where we schematically indicated the dependence on the other dimensionless couplings. If this flow equation now has a nontrivial fixed point \(\infty > g_{\rm{N}}^{\ast} > 0\), the only way how the righthandside can vanish is for \({\eta _{\rm{N}}}({\rm{g}}_{\rm{N}}^{\ast},\,{\rm{other}}) = 2  d\), irrespective of the detailed behavior of the other couplings as long as no blowup occurs. This is a huge anomalous dimension. For a graviton “test propagator” (see below) the key property of η_{N} is that it gives rise to a high momentum behavior of the form \({({p^2})^{ 1 + {\eta _{\rm{N}}}/2}}\) modulo logarithms, or a short distance behavior of the form \({(\sqrt {{x^2}})^{2  d  {\eta _{\rm{N}}}}}\) modulo logarithms. Keeping only the leading part the vanishing power at η_{N} = 2 − d translates into a logarithmic behavior, ln x^{2}, formally the same as for massless KleinGordon fields in a twodimensional field theory. We shall comment on potential pitfalls of such an argument below.
In accordance with this argument a 1/p^{4} type propagator goes hand in hand with a nonGaussian fixed point for g_{N} in two other computational settings: in strictly renormalizable higher derivative theories (see Section 2.3.2 and in the 1/N expansion [216, 217, 203]. In the latter case a nontrivial fixed point goes hand in hand with a graviton propagator whose high momentum behavior is of the form 1/(p^{4} ln p^{2}), in four dimensions, and formally 1/p^{d} in d dimensions.
The fact that a large anomalous dimension occurs at a nonGaussian fixed point was first observed in the context of the 2 + ϵ expansion [116, 117] and then noticed in computations based on truncated flow equations [133]. The above variant of the argument [157] shows that no specific computational information enters. It highlights what is special about the EinsteinHilbert term (within the class of local gravitational actions): it is the kinetic (second derivative) term itself which carries a dimensionful coupling. Of course one could assign to the metric a mass dimension 2, in which case Newton’s constant would be dimensionless. However one readily checks that then the wave function renormalization constant of a standard matter kinetic term acquires a mass dimension d − 2 for bosons and d − 1 for fermions, respectively. Assuming that the dimensionless parameter associated with them remains nonzero as μ → ∞, one can repeat the above argument and finds now that all matter propagators have a 1/p^{d} high momentum behavior, or a ln x^{2} short distance behavior. It is this universality which justifies to attribute the modification in the short distance behavior of the fields to a modification of the underlying (random) geometry. This may be viewed as a specific variant of the old expectation that gravity acts as a short distance regulator.
Let us stress that while the anomalous dimension always governs the UV behavior in the vicinity of a (UV) fixed point, it is in general not related to the geometry of field propagation (see [125] for a discussion in QCD). What is special about gravity is ultimately that the propagating field itself determines distances. In the context of the above argument this is used in the reshuffling of the soft UV behavior to matter propagators. The propagators used here should be viewed as “test propagators”, not as physical ones. One transplants the information in η_{N} derived from the gravitational functional integral into a conventional propagator on a (flat or curved) background spacetime. The reduced dimension two should be viewed as an “interaction dimension” specifying roughly the (normalized) number of independent degrees of freedom a randomly picked one interacts with.
The same conclusion (1/p^{d} propagators or interaction dimension 2) can be reached in a number of other ways as well, which are described in Section 2.4. A more detailed understanding of the microstructure of the random geometries occuring in an asymptotically safe functional integral remains to be found (see however [135, 134]).
Accepting this dimensional reduction as a working hypothesis it is natural to ask whether there exists a twodimensional field theory which provides an quantitatively accurate (‘effective’) description of this extreme UV regime. Indeed, one can identify a number of characteristics such a field theory should have, using only the main ideas of the scenario (see the end of Section 2.4). The asymptotic safety of such a field theory would then strongly support the corresponding property of the full theory and the selfconsistency of the scenario. In summary, we have argued that the qualitative properties of the gravitational functional integral in the extreme ultraviolet follow directly from the previously highlighted principles: the existence of a nontrivial UV fixed point, asymptotic safety of the couplings, and antiscreening. Moreover these UV properties can be probed for selfconsistency.
1.2 Evidence for asymptotic safety
Presently the evidence for asymptotic safety in quantum gravity comes from the following very different computational settings: the 2 + ϵ expansion, perturbation theory of higher derivative theories, a large N expansion in the number of matter fields, the study of symmetry truncations, and that of truncated functional flow equations. Arguably none of the pieces of evidence is individually compelling but taken together they make a strong case for asymptotic safety.
The results from the 2 + ϵ expansion were part of Weinberg’s original motivation to propose the scenario. Since gravity in two and three dimensions is nondynamical, however, the lessons for a genuine quantum gravitational dynamics are somewhat limited. Higher derivative theories were known to be strictly renormalizable with a finite number of couplings, at the expense of having unphysical propagating modes (see [207, 206, 83, 19, 59]). In hindsight one can identify a nonGaussian fixed point for Newton’s constant already in this setting (see [54] and Section 2.3). The occurance of this nonGaussian fixed point is closely related to the 1/p^{4}type propagator that is used. The same happens when (Einstein or a higher derivative) gravity is coupled to a large number N of matter fields and a 1/N expansion is performed. A nontrivial fixed point is found that goes hand in hand with a 1/p^{4}type progagator (modulo logs), which here arises from a resummation of matter selfenergy bubbles, however.
As emphasized before the challenge of Quantum Gravidynamics is not so much to achieve (perturbative or nonperturbative) renormalizability but to reconcile asymptotically safe couplings with the absence of unphysical propagating modes. Two recent developments provide complementary evidence that this might indeed be feasible. Both of these developments take into account the dynamics of infinitely many physical degrees of freedom of the fourdimensional gravitational field. In order to be computationally feasible the ‘coarse graining’ has to be constrained somehow. To do this the following two strategies have been pursued (which we label Strategies (c) and (d) according to the discussion below):
(c) The metric fluctuations are constrained by a symmetry requirement, but the full (infinitedimensional) renormalization group dynamics is considered. We shall refer to this as the strategy via symmetry reductions.
(d) All metric fluctuations are taken into account but the renormalization group dynamics is projected onto a lowdimensional submanifold. Since this is done using truncations of functional renormalization group equations, we shall refer to this as the strategy via truncated functional flow equations.
Both strategies (truncation in the fluctuations but unconstrained flow and unconstrained quantum fluctuations but constrained flow) are complementary. Tentatively both results are related by the dimensional reduction phenomenon described before (see Section 2.4). The techniques used are centered around the background effective action, but are otherwise fairly different. For the reader’s convenience we included summaries of the relevant aspects in Appendices A and B. The main results obtained from Strategies (c) and (d) are reviewed in Sections 3 and 4, respectively.
For the remainder of this section we now first survey the pieces of evidence from all the computational settings (ad):
(a) Evidence from 2 + ϵ expansions: In the nongravitational examples of perturbatively nonrenormalizable field theories with a nonGaussian fixed point the nonGaussian fixed point can be viewed as a ‘remnant’ of an asymptotically free fixed point in a lowerdimensional version of the theory. It is thus natural to ask how gravity behaves in this respect. In d = 2 spacetime dimensions Newton’s constant g_{N} is dimensionless, and formally the theory with the bare action \(g_{\rm{N}}^{ 1}\int {{d^2}x\sqrt g R(g)}\) is power counting renormalizable in perturbation theory. However, as the EinsteinHilbert term is purely topological in two dimensions, the inclusion of local dynamical degrees of freedom requires, at the very least, starting from 2 + ϵ dimensions and then studying the behavior near ϵ → 0^{+}. The resulting “ϵexpansion” amounts to a double expansion in the number of ‘graviton’ loops and in the dimensionality parameter ϵ. Typically dimensional regularization is used, in which case the UV divergencies give rise to the usual poles in 1/ϵ. Specific for gravity are however two types of complications. The first one is due to the fact that \(\int {{d^{2 + \epsilon}}x\sqrt g R(g)}\) is topological at ϵ = 0, which gives rise to additional “kinematical” poles of order 1/ϵ in the graviton propagator. The goal of the renormalization process is to remove both the ultraviolet and the kinematical poles in physical quantities. The second problem is that in pure gravity Newton’s constant is an inessential parameter, i.e. it can be changed at will by a field redefinition. Newton’s constant g_{N} can be promoted to a coupling proper by comparing its flow with that of the coefficient of some reference operator, which is fixed to be constant.
For the reference operator various choices have been adopted (we follow the discussion in Kawai et al. [118, 116, 117, 3] with the conventions of [117]):

(i)
a cosmological constant term \(\int {{d^{2 + \epsilon}}x\sqrt g}\),

(ii)
monomials from matter fields which are quantum mechanically nonscale invariant in d = 2,

(iii)
monomials from matter fields which are quantum mechanically scale invariant in d = 2,

(iv)
the conformal mode of the metric itself in a background field expansion.
All choices lead to a flow equation of the form
but the coefficient γ depends on the choice of the reference operator [118]. For all γ > 0 there is a nontrivial fixed point \(g_{\rm{N}}^{\ast} = \varepsilon/\gamma > 0\) with a onedimensional unstable manifold. In other words g_{N} is an asymptotically safe coupling in 2 + ϵ dimensions, and the above rule of thumb suggests that this a remnant of a nontrivial fixed point in d = 4 with respect to which g_{N} is asymptotically safe (see Section 1.4 for the renormalization group terminology).
Technically the nonuniversality of γ arises from the beforementioned kinematical poles. In the early papers [86, 53, 227] the Choice i was adopted giving γ = 19/(24π), or γ = (19 − c)/(24π) if free matter of central charge c is minimally coupled. A typical choice for Choice ii is a mass term of a Dirac fermion, a typical choice for Choice iii is the coupling of a fourfermion (Thirring) interaction. Then γ comes out as γ = (19 + 6Δ_{0} − c)/(24π), where Δ_{0} = 1/2, 1, respectively. Here Δ_{0} is the scaling dimension of the reference operator, and again free matter of central charge c has been minimally coupled. It has been argued in [118] that the loop expansion in this context should be viewed as double expansion in powers of ϵ and 1/c, and that reference operators with Δ_{0} = 1 are optimal. The Choice iv has been pursued systematically in a series of papers by Kawai et al. [116, 117, 3]. It is based on a parameterization of the metric in terms of a background metric ḡ_{μν}, the conformal factor e^{σ}, and a part f_{μν} which is traceless, ḡ^{μν}f_{μν} = 0. Specifically \({g_{\mu v}} = {{\bar g}_{\mu \rho}}{({e^f})^\rho}_v{e^\sigma}\) is inserted into the EinsteinHilbert action; propagators are defined (after gauge fixing) by the terms quadratic in σ and f_{μν}, and vertices correspond to the higher order terms. This procedure turns out to have a number of advantages. First the conformal mode σ is renormalized differently from the f_{μν} modes and can be viewed as defining a reference operator in itself; in particular the coefficient γ comes out as ν = (25 − c)/(24π). Second, and related to the first point, the system has a welldefined ϵexpansion (absence of poles) to all loop orders. Finally this setting allows one to make contact to the exact (KPZ [122]) solution of twodimensional quantum gravity in the limit ϵ → 0.
(b) Evidence from perturbation theory and large N: Modifications of the EinsteinHilbert action where fourth derivative terms are included are known to be perturbatively renormalizable [206, 83, 19, 59]. A convenient parameterization is
Here c_{d} is a constant such that c_{4} = 16π, C^{2} is the square of the Weyl tensor, and E is the integrand of the GaussBonnet term. In d = 4 the latter is negligible, unless dimensional regularization is used. The sign of the crucial C^{2} coupling s > 0 is fixed by the requirement that the Euclidean functional integral is damping. The oneloop beta functions for the (nonnegative) couplings, s, ω, θ, are known and on the basis of them these couplings are expected to be asymptotically safe. In particular s is asymptotically free, lim_{μ→0} s(μ) = 0. The remaining couplings Λ and c_{d}G_{N} are made dimensionless via c_{d}G_{N} = μ^{−2}g_{N}, Λ = μ^{4} 2λ/g_{N}, where μ is the renormalization scale. At s = 0 these flow equations are compatible with the existence of a nontrivial fixed point for Newton’s constant, \(g_{\rm{N}}^{\ast} \neq 0\). The value of \(g_{\rm{N}}^{\ast}\) is highly nonuniversal but it cannot naturally be made to vanish, i.e. the nontrivial and the trivial fixed point, \(g_{\rm{N}}^{\ast} = 0\), do not merge. The rationale for identifying a nontrivial fixed point by perturbative means is explained in Section 2.2. The benign renormalizability properties seen in this framework are mostly due to the 1/p^{4} type propagator, at the expense of unphysical propagating modes.
The action (1.7) can be supplemented by a matter action, containing a large number, O(N), of free matter fields. One can then keep the product N · c_{d}G_{N} fixed, retain the usual normalization of the matter kinetic terms, and expand in powers of 1/N. Renormalizability of the resulting ‘large N expansion’ then amounts to being able to remove the UV cutoff order by order in the formal series in 1/N. This type of studies was initiated by Tomboulis where the gravity action was taken either the pure Ricci scalar [216], Ricci plus cosmological term [203], or a higher derivative action [217], with free fermionic matter in all cases. More recently the technique was reconsidered [169] with Equation (1.7) as the gravity action and free matter consisting of Nn_{S} scalar fields, Nn_{D} Dirac fields, and Nn_{M} Maxwell fields.
Starting from the EinsteinHilbert action the high energy behavior of the usual 1/p^{2}type propagator gets modified. To leading order in 1/N the modified propagator can be viewed as the graviton propagator with an infinite number of fermionic selfenergy bubbles inserted and resummed. The resummation changes the high momentum behavior from 1/p^{2} to 1/(p^{4} ln p^{2}), in four dimensions. In 2 < d < 4 dimensions the resulting 1/N expansion is believed to be renormalizable in the sense that the UV cutoff Λ can strictly be removed order by order in 1/N without additional (counter) terms in the Lagrangian. In d = 4 the same is presumed to hold provided an extra C^{2} term is included in the bare Lagrangian, as in Equation (1.7). After removal of the cutoff the beta functions of the dimensionless couplings can be analyzed in the usual way and already their leading 1/N term will decide about the flow pattern.
The qualitative result (due to Tomboulis [216] and Smolin [203]) is that there exists a nontrivial fixed point for the dimensionless couplings g_{N}, λ, and s. Its unstable manifold is three dimensional, i.e. all couplings are asymptotically safe. Repeating the computation in 2 + ϵ dimensions the fixed point still exists and (taking into account the different UV regularization) corresponds to the large c (central charge) limit of the fixed point found the 2 + ϵ expansion.
These results have recently been confirmed and extended by Percacci [169] using the heat kernel expansion. In the presence of Nn_{S} scalar fields, Nn_{D} Dirac fields, and Nn_{M} Maxwell fields, the flow equations for g_{N}, λ and s come out to leading order in 1/N as
One sees that the C^{2} coupling is always asymptotically free, and that Newton’s constant has a nontrivial fixed point, g_{N}/(4π)^{2} = 12/(− n_{S} + 2n_{D} + 4n_{M}), which is positive if the number of matter fields is not too large.
As a caveat one should add that the 1/p^{4}type propagators occuring both in the perturbative and in the large N framework are bound to have an unphysical pole at some intermediate momentum scale. This pole corresponds to unphysical propagating modes and it is the price to pay for (strict) perturbative renormalizability combined with asymptotically safe couplings. From this point of view, the main challenge of Quantum Gravidynamics lies in reconciling asymptotically safe couplings with the absence of unphysical propagating modes. Precisely this can be achieved in the context of the 2 + 2 reduction.
(c) Evidence from symmetry reductions: Here one considers the usual gravitational functional integral but restricts it from “4geometries modulo diffeomorphisms” to “4geometries constant along a 2 + 2 foliation modulo diffeomorphisms”. This means that instead of the familiar 3 + 1 foliation of geometries one considers a foliation in terms of twodimensional hypersurfaces Σ and performs the functional integral only over configurations that are constant as one moves along the stack of twosurfaces. Technically this constancy condition is formulated in terms of two commuting vectors fields \({K_a} = {K_a}^\alpha {\partial _\alpha},\,a = 1,2\), that are Killing vectors of the class of geometries g considered, \({{\mathcal L}_{{K_a}}}{g_{\alpha \beta}} = 0\). For definiteness we consider here only the case where both Killing vectors are spacelike. From this pair of Killing vector fields one can form the symmetric 2 × 2 matrix \({M_{ab}}: = {g_{\alpha \beta}}{K_a}^\alpha {K_b}^\beta\). Then γ_{αβ} ≔ g_{αβ} − M^{ab}K_{aα}K_{bβ} (with M^{ab} the components of M^{−1} and \({K_{a\alpha}}: = {g_{\alpha \beta}}{K_a}^\beta\)) defines a metric on the orbit space Σ which obeys \({{\mathcal L}_{{K_a}}}{\gamma _{\alpha \beta}} = 0\) and \(K_a^\alpha {\gamma _{\alpha \beta}} = 0\). The functional integral is eventually performed over metrics of the form
where the 10 components of a metric tensor are parameterized by the 3 + 3 independent functions in γ_{αβ} and M_{ab}. Each of these functions is constant along the stack of twosurfaces but may be arbitrarily rough within a twosurface.
In the context of the asymptotic safety scenario the restriction of the functional integral to metrics of the form (1.9) is a very fruitful one:

The restricted functional integral inherits the perturbative nonrenormalizability (with finitely many relevant couplings) from the full theory.

It takes into account the crucial ‘spin2’ aspect, that is, linear and nonlinear gravitational waves with two independent polarizations per spacetime point are included.

It goes beyond the Eikonal approximation [209, 71] whose dynamics can be understood via a related 2 + 2 decomposition [113, 73].

Based on heuristic arguments the dynamics of full Quantum Gravidynamics is expected to be effectively twodimensional in the extreme ultraviolet with qualitative properties resembling that of the 2 + 2 truncation. The renormalization of the 2 + 2 truncation can thus serve as a prototype study and its asymptotic safety probes the selfconsistency of the scenario.

For the restricted functional integral the full infinitedimensional renormalization group dynamics can be studied; it reveals both a Gaussian and a nonGaussian fixed point, where the properties of the latter are compatible with the existence of a nonperturbative continuum limit.
Two additional bonus features are: In this sector the explicit construction of Dirac observables is feasible (classically and presumably also in the quantum theory). Finally a large class of matter couplings is easily incorporated.
As mentioned the effective dynamics looks twodimensional. Concretely the classical action describing the dynamics of the 2Killing vector subsector is that of a noncompact symmetric space sigmamodel nonminimally coupled to 2D gravity via the “area radius” \(\rho : = \sqrt {\det {{({M_{ab}})}_{1 \leq a,b \leq 2}}}\), of the two Killing vectors. To avoid a possible confusion let us stress, however, that the system is very different from most other models of quantum gravity (minisuperspace, 2D quantum gravity or dilaton gravity, Liouville theory, topological theories) in that it has infinitely many local and selfinteracting dynamical degrees of freedom. Moreover these are literally (an infinite subset of) the degrees of freedom of the fourdimensional gravitational field, not just analogues thereof. The corresponding classical solutions (for both signatures of the Killing vectors) have been widely studied in the general relativity literature, c.f. [98, 26, 121]. We refer to [45, 46, 56] for details on the reduction procedure and [197] for a canonical formulation.
Technically the renormalization is done by borrowing covariant background field techniques from Riemannian sigmamodels (see [84, 110, 201, 57, 220, 162]). In the particular application here the sigmamodel perturbation theory is partially nonperturbative from the viewpoint of a graviton loop expansion as not all of the metric degrees of freedom are Taylor expanded in the bare action (see Section 3.2). This together with the field reparameterization invariance blurs the distinction between a perturbative and a nonperturbative treatment of the gravitational modes. The renormalization can be done to all orders of sigmamodel perturbation theory, which is ‘notreallyperturbative’ for the gravitational modes. It turns out that strict cutoff independence can be achieved only by allowing for infinitely many essential couplings. They are conveniently combined into a generating functional h, which is a positive function of one real variable. Schematically the renormalized action takes the form [154]
Here g is a metric of the form (1.9), S_{EH}[g] is the EinsteinHilbert action evaluated on it, and h(ρ) is the generating coupling function evaluated on the renormalized area radius field ρ. Higher derivative terms are not needed in this subsector for the absorption of counter terms; the “other second derivative terms” needed are known explicitly.
This “coupling functional” is scale dependent and is subject to a flow equation of the form
where μ is the renormalization scale and μ ↦ h(·, μ) is the ‘running’ generating functional. To preclude a misunderstanding let us stress that the function h(·, μ) changes with μ, irrespective of the name of the argument, not just its value on ρ, say. Interestingly a closed formula for the beta function (or functional) in Equation (1.11) can be found [154, 155]. The resulting flow equation is a nonlinear partial integrodifferential equation and difficult to analyze. The fixed points however are easily found. Apart from the degenerate ‘Gaussian’ one, 1/h ≡ 0, there is a nontrivial fixed point h^{beta}(·). For the Gaussian fixed point a linearized stability analysis is empty, the structure of the quadratic perturbation equation suggests that it has both attractive and repulsive directions in the space of functions h. For the nonGaussian fixed point h^{beta}(·) a linearized stability analysis is nonempty and leads to a system of linear integrodifferential equations. It can be shown [155] that all linearized perturbations decay for μ → ∞, which is precisely what Weinberg’s criterion for asymptotic safety asks for. Moreover the basic propagator used is free from unphysical poles. Applying the criterion described in Section 1.3 this strongly suggests that a continuum limit exist for the 2 + 2 reduced Quantum Gravidynamics beyond approximations (like the sigmamodel perturbation theory/partially nonperturbative graviton expansion used to compute Equation (1.11)). See [158] for a proposed ‘exact’ bootstrap construction, whose relation to a 2 + 2 truncated functional integral however remains to be understood.
In summary, in the context of the 2 + 2 reduction an asymptotically safe coupling flow can be reconciled with the absence of unphysical propagating modes. In contrast to the technique on which Evidence (d) below is based the existence of an infinite cutoff limit here can be shown and does not have to be stipulated as a hypothesis subsequently probed for selfconsistency. Since the properties of the 2 + 2 truncation qualitatively are the ones one would expect from an ‘effective’ field theory describing the extreme UV aspects of Quantum Gravidynamics (see the end of Section 2.4), its asymptotic safety is a strong argument for the selfconsistency of the scenario.
(d) Evidence from truncated flows of the effective average action: The effective average action Γ_{Λ,k} is a generating functional generalizing the usual effective action, to which it reduces for k = 0. Here Γ_{λ,k} depends on the UV cutoff Λ and an additional scale k, indicating that in the defining functional integral roughly the field modes with momenta p in the range k ≤ p ≤ Λ have been integrated out. Correspondingly Γ_{λ,λ} gives back the bare action and Γ_{λ,0} = Γ_{λ} is the usual quantum effective action, in the presence of the UV cutoff Λ. The modes in the momentum range k ≤ p ≤ Λ are omitted or suppressed by a mode cutoff ‘action’ C_{Λ,k}, and one can think of Γ_{λ,k} as being the conventional effective action Γ_{λ} but computed with a bare action that differs from the original one by the addition of C_{Λ,k}; specifically
A summary of the key properties of the effective average action (1.12) can be found in Appendix C. Here we highlight that from the regularized functional integral defining Γ_{λ,k} an (‘exact’) functional renormalization group equation (FRGE) can be derived. Schematically it has the form \(k{d \over {dk}}{\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}} = {\rm{rhs}}\), where the “righthandside” involves the Hessian of Γ_{λ,k} with respect to the dynamical fields. The FRGE itself (that is, its righthandside) carries no explicit dependence on the UV cutoff, or one which can trivially be removed. However the removal of the UV regulator Λ implicit in the definition of Γ_{λ,k} is nontrivial and is related to the traditional UV renormalization problem (see Section 2.2). Whenever massless degrees of freedom are involved, also the existence of the k → 0 limit of Γ_{λ,k} is nontrivial and requires identification of the proper infrared degrees of freedom. In the present context we take this for granted and focus on the UV aspects.
The effective average action has been generalized to gravity [179] and we shall describe it and its properties in more detail in Sections 4.1 and 4.2. As before the metric is taken as the dynamical variable but the bare action Γ_{λ,λ} is not specified from the outset. In fact, conceptually it is largely determined by the requirement that a continuum limit exists (see the criterion in Section 2.2). Γ_{λ,λ} can be expected to have a welldefined derivative expansion with the leading terms roughly of the form (1.7). Also the gravitational effective average action Γ_{λ,k} obeys an ‘exact’ FRGE, which is a new computational tool in quantum gravity not limited to perturbation theory. In practice Γ_{λ,k} is replaced in this equation with a Λ independent functional interpreted as Γ_{∞,k}. The assumption that the ‘continuum limit’ Γ_{∞,k} for the gravitational effective average action exists is of course what is at stake here. The strategy in the FRGE approach is to show that this assumption, although without apriori justification, is consistent with the solutions of the flow equation \(k{d \over {dk}}{\Gamma _{\infty, k}} = {\rm{rhs}}\) (where righthandside now also refers to the Hessian of Γ_{∞,k}). The structure of the solutions Γ_{k} of this cutoff independent FRGE should be such that they can plausibly be identified with Γ_{∞,k}. Presupposing the ‘infrared safety’ in the above sense, a necessary condition for this is that the limits lim_{k→∞} Γ_{k} and lim_{k→0} Γ_{k} exist. Since k ≤ Λ the first limit probes whether Λ can be made large; the second condition is needed to have all modes integrated out. In other words one asks for global existence of the Γ_{k} flow obtained by solving the cutoff independent FRGE. Being a functional differential equation the cutoff independent FRGE requires an initial condition, i.e. the specification of a functional Γ_{initial} which coincides with Γ_{k} at some scale k = k_{initial}. The point is that only for very special ‘fine tuned’ initial functionals Γ_{initial} will the associated solution of the cutoff independent FRGE exist globally [157]. The existence of the k → ∞ limit in this sense can be viewed as the counterpart of the UV renormalization problem, namely the determination of the unstable manifold associated with the fixed point lim_{k→∞} Γ_{k}. We refer to Section 2.2 for a more detailed discussion of this issue.
In practice of course a nonlinear functional differential equation is very difficult to solve. To make the FRGE computationally useful the space of functionals is truncated typically to a finitedimensional one of the form
where the I_{i} are given ‘wellchosen’ — local or nonlocal — functionals of the fields (among them the expectation value of the metric 〈g_{αβ}〉 in the case of gravity) and the g_{i}(k) are numerical parameters that carry the scale dependence. For I_{i}’s obeying a nonredundancy condition, the g_{i} play the role of essential couplings which have been normalized to have vanishing mass dimension by taking out a power \({k^{{d_i}}}\). The original FRGE then can be converted into a system of nonlinear ordinary differential equations for these couplings. In the case of gravity the following ansatz has been made [133, 131]:
where g = (g_{αβ})_{1≤,α,β≤4} is the metric and R(g) is the associated curvature scalar. The flow pattern k ↦ (g_{0}(k), g_{1} (k), g_{2}(k)) displays a number of remarkable properties. Most importantly a nonGaussian fixed point exists (first found in [204] based on [179] and extensively corroborated in [205, 133, 131, 136, 39]). Within the truncation (1.14) a threedimensional subset of initial data is attracted to the fixed point under the reversed flow
where the fixed point couplings \(g_i^{\ast}\), i = 0, 1, 2, are finite and positive and no blowup occurs in the flow for large k. Moreover unphysical propagating modes appear to be absent. Again this adheres precisely to the asymptotic safety criterion. Some of the trajectories with initial data in the unstable manifold cannot quite be extended to k → 0, due to (infrared) singularities. This problem is familiar from nongravitational theories and is presumably an artifact of the truncation. In the vicinity of the fixed point, on the other hand, all trajectories show remarkable robustness properties against modifications of the mode cutoff scheme (see Section 4.3) which provide good reasons to believe that the structural aspects of the above results are not an artifact of the truncation used. The upshot is that there is a clear signal for asymptotic safety in the subsector (1.13), obtained via truncated functional renormalization flow equations.
The impact of matter has been studied by Percacci et al. [72, 171, 170]. Minimally coupling free fields (bosons, fermions, or Abelian gauge fields) one finds that the nonGaussian fixed point is robust, but the positivity of the fixed point couplings \(g_0^{\ast} > 0\), \(g_1^{\ast} > 0\) puts certain constraints on the allowed number of copies. When a selfinteracting scalar χ is coupled nonminmally via \(\sqrt g \left[ {\left({{k_0} + {k_2}{{\rm{\chi}}^2} + {k_4}{{\rm{\chi}}^4} + \ldots} \right)R\left(g \right) + {\lambda _0} + {\lambda _2}{{\rm{\chi}}^2} + \cdots + \partial {\rm{\chi}}\partial {\rm{\chi}}} \right]\), one finds a fixed point \(k_0^{\ast} > 0\), \(\lambda _0^{\ast} > 0\) (whose values are with matched normalizations the same as \(g_1^{\ast}\), \(g_0^{\ast}\) in the pure gravity computation) while all selfcouplings vanish, \(k_2^{\ast} = k_4^{\ast} = \cdots = 0\), \(\lambda _2^{\ast} = \lambda _4^{\ast} = \cdots = 0\). In the vicinity of the fixed point a linearized stability analysis can be performed; the admixture with λ_{0} and κ_{0} then lifts the marginality of λ_{4}, which becomes marginally irrelevant [171, 170]. The running of κ_{0} and λ_{0} is qualitatively unchanged as compared to pure gravity, indicating that the asymptotic safety property is robust also with respect to the inclusion of selfinteracting scalars.
Both Strategies (c) and (d) involve truncations and one may ask to what extent the results are significant for the (intractable) full renormalization group dynamics. In our view they are significant. This is because even for the truncated problems there is no apriori reason for the asymptotic safety property. In the Strategy (c) one would in the coupling space considered naively expect a zerodimensional unstable manifold rather than the codimension zero one that is actually found! In Case (d) the ansatz (1.13, 1.14) implicitly replaces the full gravitational dynamics by one whose functional renormalization flow is confined to the subspace (1.13, 1.14) (similar to what happens in a hierarchical approximation). However there is again no apriori reason why this approximate dynamics should have a nonGaussian fixed point with positive fixed point couplings and with an unstable manifold of codimension zero. Both findings are genuinely surprising.
Nevertheless even surprises should have explanations in hindsight. For the asymptotic safety property of the truncated Quantum Gravidynamics in Strategies (c) and (d) the most natural explanation seems to be that it reflects the asymptotic safety of the full dynamics with respect to a nontrivial fixed point.
Tentatively both results are related by the dimensional reduction of the residual interactions in the ultraviolet. Alternatively one could try to merge both strategies as follows. One could take the background metrics in the background effective action generic and only impose the 2Killing vector condition on the integration variables in the functional integral. Computationally this is much more difficult; however it would allow one to compare the lifted 4D flow with the one obtained from the truncated flows of the effective average action, presumably in truncations far more general than the ones used so far. A better way to relate both strategies would be by trying to construct a twodimensional UV field theory with the characteristics to be described at the end of Section 2.4 and show its asymptotic safety.
1.3 Some working definitions
Here we attempt to give working definitions for some of the key terms used before.
Quantum Gravidynamics: We shall use the term “Quantum Gravidynamics” to highlight a number of points in the present circle of ideas. First, that one aims at relating the micro and the macrophysics of the gravitational field through a renormalization flow defined conceptually in terms of a functional integral. In contrast to “Quantum General Relativity” the microscopic action is allowed to be very different from the EinsteinHilbert action or a discretization thereof. Plausibly it should be still quasilocal, i.e. have a welldefined derivative expansion, and based on perturbatively renormalizable higher derivative theories one would expect it to contain at least quartic derivative terms. This means that also the number of physical propagating degrees of freedom (with respect to a background) may be different from the number entailed by the EinsteinHilbert action. The second motivation for the term comes from the analogy with Quantum Chromodynamics. Indeed, the premise is that the selfinteraction for the quantized gravitational field is predominantly “antiscreening” in the ultraviolet in a similar sense as in Quantum Chromodynamics, where it is responsible for the characteristic high energy behavior of physical quantities. As in Quantum Chromodynamics the proper identification of the antagonistic degrees of freedom (screening versus antiscreening) may well depend on the choice of field variables.
As with “Quantum General Relativity” we take the term “Gravidynamics” in a broad sense, allowing for any set of field variables (e.g. vielbein and spin connection, Ashtekar’s variables, Plebanski and BF type formulations, teleparallel, etc.) that can be used to recast general relativity (see e.g. the review [167]). For example the coupling of fermions might be a good reason to use a vielbein formulation. If the metric is taken as dynamical variable in four dimensions we shall also use the term “Quantum Einstein Gravity” as in [154, 133, 131]. It is of course not assumed from the outset that the quantum gravidynamics based on the various set of field variables are necessarily equivalent.
Gaussian fixed point: A fixed point is called Gaussian if there exists a choice of field variables for which the fixed point action is quadratic in the fields and the functional measure is Gaussian. This includes the local case but also allows for nonlocal quadratic actions. The drawback of this definition is that the proper choice of field variables in which the measure reveals its Gaussian nature may be hard to find. (For example in the correlation functions of the spin field in the twodimensional Ising model the underlying free fermionic theory is not visible.)
A nonGaussian fixed point is simply one where no choice of fields can be found in which the measure becomes Gaussian. Unfortunately this, too, is not a very operational criterion.
Unstable manifold: The unstable manifold of a fixed point with respect to a coarse graining operation is the set of all points that can be reached along flow lines emanating from the fixed point, the socalled renormalized trajectories. Points on such a flow line correspond to perfect actions. The stable manifold is the set of points attracted to the fixed point in the direction of coarse graining.
Strict (weak) renormalizability: We call a field theory strictly (weakly) renormalizable with respect to a fixed point and a coarse graining operation if the dimension of its unstable manifold is finite (infinite). It is implied that if a field theory has this property with respect to one coarse graining operation it will have it with respect to many others (“universality”). Strict or weak renormalizability is believed to be a sufficient condition for the existence of a genuine continuum limit for observables.
Relevant coupling: Given an expansion “sum over couplings times interaction monomials”, a coarse graining operation, and a fixed point of it, a coupling is called relevant (irrelevant) if it is driven away from (towards) the value the corresponding coordinate has at the fixed point, under a sufficient number of coarse graining steps. Note that this distinction makes sense even for trajectories not connected to the fixed point (because they terminate). It is however an explicitly ‘coordinate dependent’ notion. The same terms are used for the interaction monomials associated with the couplings. The dimension of the unstable manifold equals the maximal number of independent relevant interaction monomials ‘connected’ to the fixed point. All points on the unstable manifold are thus parameterized by relevant couplings but not vice versa.
Couplings which are relevant or irrelevant in a linearized analysis are called linearly relevant or linearly irrelevant, respectively. A coupling which is neither linearly relevant nor linearly irrelevant is called (linearly) marginal.
Continuum limit: By a genuine continuum limit we mean here a limit in which physical quantities become:

(C1) strictly independent of the UV cutoff,

(C2) independent of the choice of the coarse graining operation (within a certain class), and

(C3) invariant under point transformations of the fields.
Usually one stipulates Properties (C1) and (C2) for the functional measure after which Property (C3) should be a provable property of physical quantities like the Smatrix. The requirement of having also Properties (C1) and (C2) only for observables is somewhat weaker and in the spirit of the asymptotic safety scenario.
Typically the Properties (C1, C2, C3) cannot be rigorously established, but there are useful criteria which render the existence of a genuine continuum limit plausible in different computational frameworks. In Sections 2.1 and 2.2 we discuss in some detail such criteria for the perturbative and for the FRGE approach, respectively. For convenience we summarize the main points here.
In renormalized perturbation theory the criterion involves two parts:

(PTC1) Existence of a formal continuum limit. This means, the removal of the UV cutoff is possible and the renormalized physical quantities are independent of the scheme and of the choice of interpolating fields — all in the sense of formal power series in the loop counting parameter. The perturbative beta functions always have a trivial (Gaussian) fixedpoint but may also have a nontrivial (nonGaussian) fixed point.
The second part of the criterion is:

(PTC2) The dimension of the unstable manifold of the (Gaussian or nonGaussian) fixed point as computed from the perturbative beta functions equals the number of independent essential couplings.
For example \(\phi _4^4\) and QED meet Criterion (PTC1) but not (PTC2) while QCD satisfies both Criterion (PTC1) and (PTC2). In the framework of the functional renormalization group equations (FRGE) similar criteria for the existence of a genuine continuum limit can be formulated. Specifically for the FRGE of the effective average action one has:

(FRGC1) The solution of the FRG equation admits (for fine tuned initial data Γ_{initial} at some k = k_{initial}) a global solution Γ_{k}, i.e. one that can be extended both to k → ∞ and to k → 0 (where the latter limit is not part of the UV problem in itself).

(FRGC2) The functional derivatives of lim_{k→0} Γ_{k} (vertex functions) meet certain requirements which ensure stability/positivity/unitarity.
In Criterion (FRGC1) the existence of the k → 0 limit in theories with massless degrees of freedom is nontrivial and the problem of gaining computational control over the infrared physics should be separated from the UV aspects of the continuum limit as much as possible. However the k → 0 limit is essential to probe stability/positivity/unitarity. For example, to obtain a (massive) Euclidean quantum field theory the Schwinger functions constructed from the vertex functions have to obey nonlinear relations which ensure that the Hilbert space reconstructed via the OsterwalderSchrader procedure has a positive definite inner product.
Perturbative (weak) renormalizability: We call a theory perturbatively (weakly) renormalizable if Criterion (PTC1) can be achieved with finitely (infinitely) many essential couplings. A theory were neither can be achieved is called perturbatively nonrenormalizable. Perturbative (weak) renormalizability is neither necessary nor sufficient for (weak or strict) renormalizability in the above nonperturbative sense. It is only in combination with Criterion (PTC2) that perturbative results are indicative for the existence of a genuine continuum limit.
Asymptotically free coupling: A nonconstant coupling in the unstable manifold of a Gaussian fixed point.
The “nonconstant” proviso is needed to exclude cases like a trivial \(\phi _4^4\) coupling. In a nonperturbative lattice construction of \(\phi _4^4\) theory only a Gaussian fixed point with a onedimensional unstable manifold (parameterized by the renormalized mass) is thought to exist, along which the renormalized \(\phi _4^4\) coupling is constant and identically zero. The Gaussian nature of the fixedpoint, on the other hand, is not crucial and we define:
Asymptotically safe coupling: A nonconstant coupling in the unstable manifold of a fixed point.
Asymptoticaly safe functional measure: The functional measure of a statistical field theory is said to be asymptotically safe if is perturbatively weakly renormalizable or nonrenormalizable, but possesses a fixed point with respect to which it is strictly renormalizable. Subject to the regularity assumption that the space of actions can in the vicinity of the fixed point be decomposed into a stable and an unstable manifold, this is equivalent to the following requirement: All relevant couplings are asymptotically safe and there is only a finite number of them. Note that unitarity or other desirable properties that would manifest itself on the level of observables are not part of this definition.
In a nongravitational context the functional measure of the 3D GrossNeveu model is presently the best candidate to be asymptotically safe in the above sense (see [101, 60, 198, 105] and references therein). Also 5D YangMills theories (see [93, 148] and references therein) are believed to provide examples. In a gravitational context, however, there are good reasons to modify this definition.
First the choice of couplings has to be physically motivated, which requires to make contact to observables. In the above nongravitational examples with a single coupling the ‘meaning’ of the coupling is obvious; in particular it is clear that it must be finite and positive at the nonGaussian fixed point. In general however one does not know whether ill behaved couplings are perverse redefinitions of better behaved ones. To avoid this problem the couplings should be defined as coefficients in a power series expansion of the observables themselves (Weinberg’s “reaction rates”; see the discussion in Section 1.1). Of course painfully little is known about (generic) quantum gravity observables, but as a matter of principle this is how couplings should be defined. In particular this will pin down the physically adequate notion of positivity or unitarity.
Second, there may be good reasons to work initially with infinitely many essential or potentially relevant couplings. Recall that the number of essential couplings entering the initial construction of the functional measure is not necessarily equal to the number eventually indispensable. In a secondary step a reduction of couplings might be feasible. That is, relations among the couplings might exist which are compatible with the renormalization flow. If these relations are sufficiently complicated, it might be better to impose them retroactively than to try to switch to a more adapted basis of interaction monomials from the beginning.
Specifically in the context of quantum gravity microscopic actions with infinitely many essential couplings occur naturally in several ways. First, when starting from the GomisWeinberg picture [94] of perturbative quantum gravity (which is implemented in a nongraviton expansion in Section 3 for the 2 + 2 reduction). Second, when power counting considerations are taken as a guideline one can use Newton’s constant (frozen in Planck units) to build dimensionless scalars (dilaton, conformal factor) and change the conformal frame arbitrarily. The way how these dimensionless scalars enter the (bare versus renormalized) action is not constrained by power counting considerations. This opens the door to an infinite number of essential couplings. The effective action for the conformal factor [149] and the dilaton field in the 2 + 2 reduction [154] provide examples of this phenomenon.
Third, the dimension of the unstable manifold is of secondary importance in this context. Recall that the dimension of the unstable manifold is the maximal number of independent relevant interaction monomials ‘connected’ to the fixed point. This maximal number may be very difficult to determine in Quantum Gravidynamics. It would require identification of all renormalized trajectories emanating from the fixed point — which may be more than what is needed physicswise: The successful construction of a subset of renormalized trajectories for physically motivated couplings may already be enough to obtain predictions/explanations for some observables. Moreover, what matters is not the total number of relevant couplings but the way how observables depend on them. Since generic observables (in the sense used in Section 1.1) are likely to be nonlinearly and nonlocally related to the metric or to the usual basis of interaction monomials (scalars built from polynomials in the curvature tensors, for instance) the condition that the theory should allow for predictions in terms of observables is only indirectly related to the total number of relevant couplings.
In summary, the interplay between the microscopic action, its parameterization through essential or relevant couplings, and observables is considerably more subtle than in the presumed nongravitational examples of asymptotically safe theories with a single coupling. The existence of an asymptotically safe functional measure in the above sense seems to be neither necessary nor sufficient for a physically viable theory of Quantum Gravidynamics. This leads to our final working definition.
Asymptotically safe Quantum Gravidynamics: A quantum theory of gravity based on a notion of an asymptotically safe functional integral measure which incorporates the interplay between couplings and observables described above. In brief:

The choice of couplings has to be based on observables; this will pin down the physically relevant notion of positivity/unitarity.

The number of essential or relevant couplings is not apriori finite.

What matters is not so much the dimension of the unstable manifold than how observables depend on the relevant couplings.
1.4 Relation to other approaches
For orientation we offer here some sketchy remarks on how Quantum Gravidynamics relates to some other approaches to Quantum Gravity, notably the Dynamical Triangulations approach, Loop Quantum Gravity, and String Theory. These remarks are of course not intended to provide a comprehensive discussion of the relative merits but merely to highlight points of contact and stark differences to Quantum Gravidynamics.
1.4.1 Dynamical triangulations
The framework closest in spirit to the present one are discretized approaches to the gravitational functional integral, where a continuum limit in the statistical field theory sense is aimed at. See [138] for a general review and [8] for the dynamical triangulations approach. Arguably the most promising variant of the latter is the causal dynamical triangulations approach by Ambjørn, Jurkiewicz, and Loll [5]. In this setting the formal four dimensional quantum gravity functional integral is replaced by a sum over discrete geometries, Z = ∑_{T}m(T)e^{iS(T)}. The geometries T are piecewise Minkowskian and selected such that they admit a Wick rotation to piecewise Euclidean geometries. The edge lengths in the spatial and the temporal directions are ℓ_{space} = a^{2} and ℓ_{time} = −αa^{2}, where a sets the discretization scale and α > 0 is an adjustable parameter. The flip α ↦ −α defines a Wick rotation under which the weights in the partition function become real: \({e^{iS(T)}} \mapsto {e^{ {S_{eucl}}(T)}}\). For α = −1 the usual expressions for the action used [8] in equilateral Euclidean dynamical triangulations are recovered, but the sum is only over those Euclidean triangulations T which lie in the image of the above Wick rotation. The weight factor m(T) is the inverse of the order of the automorphism group of the triangulation, i.e. 1 for almost all of them. With these specifications the goal is to construct a continuum limit by sending a → 0 and the number N of simplices to infinity, while adjusting the two bare parameters (corresponding to Newton’s constant and a cosmological constant) in S_{eucl}(T) as well as the overall scale of Z. Very likely, in order for such a continuum limit to exist and to be insensitive against modifications of the discretized setting, a renormalization group fixed point in the coupling flow is needed. Assuming that the system indeed has a fixed point, this fixed point would by construction have a nontrivial unstable manifold, and ideally both couplings would be asymptotically safe, thereby realizing the strong asymptotic safety scenario (using the terminology of Section 1.3). Consistent with this picture and the previously described dimensional reduction phenomenon for asymptotically safe functional measures (see also Section 2.4), the microscopic geometries appear to be effectively twodimensional [6, 7].
Despite these similarities there are (for the time being) also important differences. First the discretized action depends on two parameters only and it is hoped that a renormalized trajectory can be found by tuning only these two parameters. Since in dynamical triangulations there is no naive (classical) continuum limit, one cannot directly compare the discretized action used with a microscopic action in the previous sense. Conceptually one can assign a microscopic action to the two parametric measure defined by the causal dynamical triangulations by requiring that combined with the regularized kinematical continuum measure (see Section 2.3.3) it reproduces the same correlation functions in the continuum limit. The microscopic action defined that way would presumably be different from the EinsteinHilbert action, but it would still contain only two tunable parameters. In other words the hope is that the particular nonnaive discretization procedure gets all but two coordinates of the unstable manifold automatically right. A second difference concerns the role of averages of the metric. The transfer matrix used in [8] is presumed to have a unique ground state for both finite and infinite triangulations. Expectation values in a reconstructed Hilbert space will refer to this ground state and hence be unique for a given operator. A microscopic metric operator does not exist in a dynamical triangulations approach but if one were to define coarse grained variants, their expectation value would have to be unique. In contrast the field theoretical formulations based on a background effective action allow for a large class of averaged metrics.
1.4.2 Loop quantum gravity
The term loop quantum gravity is by now used for a number of interrelated formulations (see [199] for a guide). For definiteness we confine our comparative remarks to the original canonical formulation using loop (holonomy) variables.
Here a reformulation of general relativity in terms of Ashtekar variables (A, E) is taken as a starting point, where schematically A and E are defined on a threedimensional time slice and are conjugate to each other, {A, E} = δ, with respect to the canonical symplectic structure (see [199, 15]). From A one can form holonomies (line integrals along loops) and from E one can form fluxes (integrals over twodimensional hypersurfaces) without using more than the manifold structure. The Poisson bracket {A, E} = δ is converted into a Poisson algebra for the holonomy and the flux variables. Two basic assumptions then govern the transition to the quantum theory: First the Poisson bracket {A, E} = δ is replaced by a commutator [A, E] = iħδ and is subsequently converted into an algebraic structure among the holonomy and flux variables. Second, representations of this algebra are sought on a state space built from multiple products of holonomies associated with a graph (spin network states). The inner product on this space is sensitive only to the coincidence or noncoincidence of the graphs labeling the states (not to their embedding into the threemanifold). Based on a Gelfand triple associated with this kinematical state space one then aims at the incorporation of dynamics via a (weak) solution of the Hamiltonian constraint of general relativity (or a ‘squared’ variant thereof). To this end one has to transplant the constraint into holonomy and flux variables so that it can act on the above state space. This step is technically difficult and the results obtained do not allow one to address the offshell closure of the constraint algebra, an essential requirement emphasized in [151].
As far as comparison with Quantum Gravidynamics is concerned, important differences occur both on a kinematical and on a dynamical level, even if a variant of Gravidynamics formulated in terms of the Ashtekar variables (A, E) was used [156]. Step one in the above quantization procedure keeps the righthandside of the commutator [A, E] = iħδ free from dynamical information. In any field theoretical framework, on the other hand, one would expect the righthandside to be modified: minimally (if A and E are multiplicatively renormalized) by multiplication with a (divergent) wave function renormalization constant, or (if A and E are nonlinearly renormalized) by having δ replaced with a more general, possibly field dependent, distribution. Stipulation of unmodified canonical commutation relations might put severe constraints on the allowed interactions, as it does in quantum field theories with a sufficiently soft ultraviolet behavior. (We have in mind here “triviality” results, where e.g. for scalar quantum field theories in dimensions d ≥ 4 a finite wave function renormalization constant goes hand in hand with the absence of interaction [24, 77]). A second marked difference to Quantum Gravidynamics is that in Loop Quantum Gravity there appears to be no room for the distinction between fine grained (‘rough’) and coarse grained (‘smooth’) geometries. The inner product used in the second of the above steps sees only whether the graphs of two spin network states coincide or not, but is insensitive to the ‘roughness’ of the geometry encoded initially in the (A, E) pair. This information appears to be lost [151]. In a field theory the geometries would be sampled according to some underlying measure and the typical configurations are very rough (nondifferentiable). As long as the above ‘holonomy inner product’ on such sampled geometries is well defined and depends only on the coincidence or noncoincidence of the graphs the information about the measure according to which the sampling is done appears to be lost. Every measure will look the same. This property seems to match the existence of a preferred diffeomorphism invariant measure [14] (on a space generated by the holonomies) which is uniquely determined by some natural requirements. The typical A configurations are also of distributional type [14, 140]. This uniqueness translates into the uniqueness of the associated representation of the holonomyflux algebra (which rephrases the content of the original [A, E] = iħδ algebra). In a field theory based on the (A, E) variables, on the other hand, there would be a cone of regularized measures which incorporate dynamical information and on which the renormalization group acts.
Another difference concerns the interplay between the dynamics and the canonical commutation relations. In a field theory the moral from Haag’s theorem is that “the choice of the representation of the canonical commutation relations is a dynamical problem” [99]. Further the inability to pick the ‘good’ representation beforehand is one way to look at the origin of the divergencies in a canonically quantized relativistic field theory. (To a certain extent the implications of Haag’s theorem can be avoided by considering scattering states and spatially cutoff interactions; in a quantum gravity context, however, it is unclear what this would amount to.) In contrast, in the above holonomy setting a preferred representation of the holonomyflux algebra is uniquely determined by a set of natural requirements which do not refer to the dynamics. The dynamics formulated in terms of the Hamiltonian constraint thus must be automatically welldefined on the above kinematical arena (see [151, 173] for a discussion of the ambiguities in such constructions). In a field theoretical framework, on the other hand, the constraints would be defined as composite operators in a way that explicitly requires dynamical information (fed in through the renormalized action). So the constraints and the space on which they act are dynamically correlated. In loop quantum gravity, in contrast, both aspects are decoupled.
Finally, the microscopic action for asymptotically safe Quantum Gravidynamics is very likely different from the EinsteinHilbert action and thus not of second order. This changes the perspective on a canonical formulation considerably.
1.4.3 String theory
String theory provides a possible context for the unification of known and unknown forces including quantum gravity [97, 177, 112]. As far as quantum gravity is concerned the point of departure is the presupposition that the renormalization problem for the quantized gravitational field is both insoluble and irrelevant. Presently a clearly defined dynamical principle that could serve as a substitute seems to be available only for socalled perturbative first quantized string theory, to which we therefore confine the following comparative comments.
In this setting certain twodimensional (supersymmetric) conformal field theories are believed to capture (some of) the ‘ultimate degrees of freedom of Nature’. The attribute ‘perturbative’ mostly refers to the fact that a functional integral over the twosurfaces on which the theories are defined is meant to be performed, too, but in a genus expansion this gives rise to a divergent and not Borel summable series. (In a nonperturbative formulation aimed at degrees of freedom corresponding to other extended objects are meant to occur and to cure this problem.) For the relation to gravity it is mainly the bosonic part of the conformal field theories which is relevant, so we take the 2D fermions to be implicitly present in the following without displaying them.
A loose relation to a gravitational functional integral then can be set up as follows. Schematically, the socalled low energy effective action S_{eff}[g] arises by functional integration over the fields of a Riemannian sigmamodel X: 2D surface → 10D target pace with metric g_{αβ}. Thus \(\int {dX{e^{ {S_g}[{\rm{X}}]}} = \exp \{ {S_{{\rm{eff}}}}[g]\}}\) is a functional integral that depends parametrically on the metric g_{αβ} which is viewed as a set of generalized couplings. The functional integral one (morally speaking) would like to make sense of in the present context is however
From the present point of view the ‘low energy’ effective action thus plays the role of a ‘Planckscale’ or microscopic action, and the sigmamodel approach makes a specific proposal for this action. (Alternatively one can reconstruct S_{eff}[g] by studying string scattering amplitudes in a flat target space g_{αβ} = η_{αβ}) Performing the additional functional integral over the metrics loosely speaking corresponds to some string field theory. However as far as the functional integral on the righthandside is concerned the string field only serves as an ‘auxiliary field’ needed to come up with the proposal for the action (whatever name one gives it) used to ‘weigh’ the metrics. In contrast, in the string paradigm, it is primarily the degrees of freedom X of the Riemannian sigmamodel one should quantize (i.e. perform a functional integral over), not the degrees freedom in the gravitational field represented by the (equivalence classes of the) metric field (or any other set of fields classically equivalent to it). In this sense the degrees of freedom gravitational field are not taken seriously in the quantum regime, as the fundamental degrees of freedom (extended objects) are supposed to be known. The point we are trying to make may become clearer if one considers superstring theory, where the effective action S_{eff} also includes YangMills fields. After compactification to four dimensions one still has to perform a functional integral over the 4D YangMills field, in order to make contact to fullyflegded QCD.
Since arguments presented after Equation (1.5) suggest a kind of ‘dimensional reduction’ to d = 2, one might be tempted to see this as a vindication of string theory from the present viewpoint. However string theory’s very departure was the presupposition that no fixed point exists for the gravitational functional integral. Moreover in string theory the sigmamodel fields relate the worldsheet to a (4 + 6dimensional) target manifold with a prescribed metric (or pairs thereof related by Tduality). The at least perturbatively known dynamics of the sigmamodel fields does not appear to simulate the functional integral over metrics (see Equation (1.16)). The additional functional integral over Euclidean worldsheet geometries is problematic in itself and leaves unanswered the question how and why it successfully captures or replaces the ultaviolet aspects of the original functional integral, other than by definition. In the context of the asymptotic safety scenario, on the other hand, the presumed reduction to effectively twodimensional propagating degrees of freedom is a consequence of the renormalization group dynamics, which in this case acts like a ‘holographic map’. This holographic map is of course not explicitly known, nor is it offhand likely that it can be described by some effective string theory. A more immediate difference is that Quantum Gravidynamics does not require the introduction of hitherto unseen degrees of freedom.
1.5 Discussion of possible objections
Here we discuss some of the possible objections to a physically viable asymptotically safe theory of quantum gravidynamics.
Q1 Since the microscopic action is likely to contain higher derivative terms, don’t the problems with nonunitarity notorious in higher derivative gravity theories reappear?
A1 In brief, the unitarity issue has not much been investigated so far, but the presumed answer is No.
First, the problems with perturbatively strictly renormalizable higher derivative theories stem mostly from the 1/p^{4}type propagator used. The alternative perturbative framework already mentioned, namely to use a 1/p^{2}type propagator at the expense of infinitely many essential (potentially ‘unsafe’) couplings, avoids this problem [94, 10]. The example of the 2 + 2 reduction shows that the reconcilation of safe couplings with the absence of unphysical propagating modes can be achieved in principle. Also the superrenormalizable gravity theories with unitary propagators proposed in [218] are intriguing in this respect.
Second, when the background effective action is used as the central object to define the quantum theory, the ‘background’ is not a solution of the classical field equations. Rather it is adjusted selfconsistenly by a condition involving the full quantum effective action (see Appendix B). If the background effective action is computed nonperturbatively (by whatever technique) the intrinsic notion of unitarity will not be related to the ‘propagator unitarity’ around a solution of the classical field equations in any simple way.
One aspect of this intrinsic positivity is the convexity of the background effective action. In the flow equation for the effective average action one can see, for example, that the wrongsign of the propagator is not an issue: If Γ_{k} is of the R + R^{2} type, the running inverse propagator \(\Gamma _k^{(2)}\) when expanded around flat space has ghosts similar to those in perturbation theory. For the FRG flow, however, this is irrelevant since in the derivation of the beta functions no background needs to be specified explicitly. All one needs is that the RG trajectories are well defined down to k = 0. This requires that \(\Gamma _k^{(2)} + {{\mathcal R}_k}\) is a positive operator for all k. In the untruncated functional flow this is believed to be the case. A rather encouraging first result in this direction comes from the R^{2} truncation [131].
More generally, the reservations towards higher derivative theories came from a loop expansion near the perturbative Gaussian fixed point. In contrast in Quantum Gravidynamics one aims at constructing the continuum limit nonperturbatively at a different fixed point. In the conventional setting one quantizes R + R^{2} as the bare action, while in Quantum Gravidynamics the bare action, defined by backtracing the renormalized trajectory to the nonGaussian fixed point, may in principle contain all sorts of curvature invariants whose impact on the positivity and causality of the theory is not even known in perturbation theory.
In the previous discussion we implicitly assumed that generic physical quantities are related in a rather simple way to the interaction monomials entering the microscopic action. For Dirac observables however this is clearly not the case. Assuming that the physically correct notion of unitarity concerns such observables it is clear that the final word on unitarity issues can only be spoken once actual observables are understood.
Q2 Doesn’t the very notion of renormalizability presuppose a length or momentum scale? Since the latter is absent in a background independent formulation, the renormalizability issue is really an artifact of the perturbative expansion around a background.
A2 No. Background independence is a subtle property of classical general relativity (see e.g. [199] for a discussion) for which it is unclear whether or not it has a compelling quantum counterpart. As far as the renormalization problem is concerned it is part of the physics premise of a functional integral type approach that there is a description independent and physically relevant distinction between coarse grained and fine grained geometries. On a classical level this amounts to the distinction, for example, between a perfect fluid solution of the field equations and one generated by its 10^{30} or so molecular constituents. A sufficiently large set of Dirac observables would be able to discriminate two such spacetimes. Whenever we shall refer later on to “coarse grained” versus “fine grained” geometries we have a similar picture in mind for the ensembles of offshell geometries entering a functional integral.
Once such a physics premise is made, the renormalization in the KadanoffWilson sense is clearly relevant for the computation of observable quantities and does not just amount to a reshuffling of artifacts. Renormalization in this sense is, for example, very likely not related to the regularization ambiguities [151, 173] appearing in loop quantum gravity. A minimal requirement for such an interpretation of the regularization ambiguites would be that reasonable coarse graining operations exist which have a preferred discretization of the EinsteinHilbert action as its fixed point. This preferred discretization would have to be such that the observables weakly commuting with the associated Hamiltonian constraint reproduce those of loop quantum gravity.
For clarity’s sake let us add that the geometries entering a functional integral are expected to be very rough on the cutoff scale (or of a distributional type without a cutoff) but superimposed to this ‘short wavelength zigzag’ should be ‘long wavelength’ modulations (defined in terms of dimensionless ratios) to which different observables are sensitive in different degrees. In general it will be impractical to base the distinction between ensembles of fine grained and coarse grained geometries directly on observables. In the background field formalism the distinction is made with respect to an initially prescribed but generic background geometry which after the functional integral is performed (entirely or in a certain mode range) gets related to the expectation value of the quantum metric by a consistency condition involving the full quantum dynamics.
Q3 Doesn’t such a nonperturbative renormalizability scenario require a hidden enhanced symmetry?
A3 Improved renormalizability properties around a given fixed point are indeed typically rooted in symmetries. A good example is QCD in a lightfront formulation where gauge invariance is an ‘emergent phenomenon’ occuring only after an infinite reduction of couplings [174]. In the case of Quantum Gravidynamics, the symmetry in question would be one that becomes visible only around the nonGaussian fixed point. If it exists, its identification would constitute a breakthrough. From the KadanoffWilson view of renormalization it is however the fixed point which is fundamental — the enhanced symmetry properties are a consequence (see the notion of generalized symmetries in [236, 160]).
Q4 Shouldn’t the proposed antiscreening be seen in perturbation theory?
A4 Maybe, maybe not. Presently no good criterion for antiscreening in this context is known. For the reasons explained in Section 1.1 it should not merely be identified with the sign of the dominant contribution to some beta function. The answer to the above question will thus depend somewhat on the identification of the proper degrees of freedom and the quantitiy considered.
As an example one can look at quantum gravity corrections to the Newton potential, which have been considered in some detail. The result is always of the form
Interpreted as a modification of Newton’s constant G(r) = G(1 + ζħG/r^{2}), one sees that ζ > 0 roughly corresponds to screening and ζ < 0 to antiscreening behavior. The value of ζ is unambigously defined in 1loop perturbation theory and is a genuine prediction of quantum gravity viewed as an effective field theory (as stressed by Donoghue). However ζ will depend on the precise definition of the nonrelativistic potential and there are various options for it.
One is via the 2 → 2 scattering amplitude. The coefficient ζ_{scatt} was computed initially by Donoghue and later by Khriplovich and Kirilin; the result considered definite in [32] is \({\zeta _{{\rm{scatt}}}} = {{41} \over {10\pi}}\). It decomposes into a negative vertex and triangle contributions \({\zeta _\upsilon} = {{105} \over {3\pi}}\), and a just slightly larger positive remainder \({\zeta _{{\rm{scatt}}}}  {\zeta _\upsilon} = {{117.3} \over {3\pi}}\) coming from box, seagull, and vacuum polarization diagrams.
Another option is to consider corrections to the Schwarzschild metric. Different sets of diagrams have been used for the definition [119, 33] and affect the parameterization (in)dependence and other properties of the corrections. Both choices advocated lead to ζ_{metric} < 0, which amounts to antiscreening.
Let us also mention alternative definitions of an effective Newton potential via Wilson lines in Regge calculus [100] or by resummation of scalar matter loops [226]. The latter gives rise to an “antiscreening” Yukawa type correction of the form \(V\left(r \right) =  {G \over {4\pi r}}\left({1  {e^{ r\sqrt {\zeta G}}}} \right)\), with ζ > 0. Via \(V(r) = \int {{{{d^3}k} \over {{{(2\pi)}^3}}}{e^{i\vec k \cdot \vec x}}G(k)/{{\vec k}^2}}\) it can be interpreted as a running Newton constant \(G(k) = G/(1 + \zeta {{\vec k}^2})\).
Q5 There are several thought experiments suggesting a fundamental limit to giving an operational meaning to spacetime resolutions, for example via generalized uncertainty relations of the form (see [85, 163, 143] and references therein)
These relations are sometimes taken as hinting at a “fundamental discretum”. If so, does this not contradict the asymptotic safety scenario, where in the fixed point regime the microscopic spacetimes become selfsimilar?
A5 No, the arguments assume that Newton’s constant G is constant. (We momentarily write G for G_{N} in \({\left({16\pi {G_{\rm{N}}}} \right)^{ 1}}\int {dx} \sqrt g R\left(g \right)\)). If G is treated as a running coupling the derivations of the uncertainty relations break down. As an example consider a photonelectron scattering process as in [143, 163]: G refers to gravity in the (‘photon’ k — ‘electron’ Δp) interaction region with a pointlike ‘electron’. If viewed as running one expects G(k) ≈ G_{*}/k^{2} in the fixed point regime. Hence in the above relation one should replace G by \({{{G_{\ast}}{c^3}} \over {{{(\Delta p)}^2}}}\). This gives
and there is no limit on the spatial resolution. One can of course decide to choose units in which G is constant by definition (see [172]) in which case the derivations go through. Our conclusion is that the perceived dichotomy between a fundamentally ‘discrete’ versus ‘continuum’ geometry may itself not be fundamental.
Each of the issues raised clearly deserves much further investigation. For the time being we conclude however that the asymptotic safety scenario is conceptually selfconsistent. It remains to assemble hard computational evidence for the existence of a nonGaussian fixed point with a nontrival and regular unstable manifold. This task will be taken up in Sections 3 and 4.
2 Renormalizing the NonRenormalizable
The modern view on renormalization has been shaped by Kadanoff and Wilson. The more familiar perturbative notion of renormalizability is neither sufficient (e.g. ϕ^{4} theory in d = 4) nor necessary (e.g. GrossNeveu model in d = 3) for renormalizability in the KadanoffWilson sense. For the convenience of the reader we summarize the main ideas in Appendix A, which also serves to introduce the terminology. The title of this section is borrowed from a paper by Gawedzki and Kupiainen [88].
In the present context the relevance of a KadanoffWilson view on renormalization is twofold: First it allows one to formulate the notion of renormalizability without reference to perturbation theory, and second it allows one to treat to a certain extent renormalizable and nonrenormalizable on the same footing. The mismatch between the perturbative nonrenormalizability of the EinsteinHilbert action and the presumed asymptotic safety of a functional measure constructed by other means can thus be systematically explored.
In a gravitational context also the significance of renormalizabilty is less clear cut, and one should presumably go back to the even more fundamental property for which renormalizability is believed to be instrumental, namely the existence of a genuine continuum limit, roughly in the sense outlined in Section 1.3. Since rigorous results based on controlled approximations are unlikely to be obtained in the near future, we describe in the following criteria for the plausible existence of a genuine continuum limit based on two uncontrolled approximations: renormalized perturbation theory and the functional renormalization group approach. Such criteria are ‘implicit wisdom’ and are hardly ever spelled out. In the context of Quantum Gravidynamics, however, the absence of an obvious counterpart of the correlation length and nonrenormalizability of the EinsteinHilbert action makes things more subtle. In Sections 2.1 and 2.2 we therefore try to make the implicit explicit and to formulate critera for the existence of a genuine continuum limit which are applicable to Quantum Gravidynamics as well.
In Section 2.3 we describe the renormalization problem for Quantum Gravidynamics and in Section 2.4 the dimensional reduction phenomenon outlined before.
For a summary of basic renormalization group concepts we refer to Appendix A and for a review of the renormalization group for the effective average action to Appendix C.
2.1 Perturbation theory and continuum limit
Perturbatively renormalizable field theories are a degenerate special case of the WilsonKadanoff framework. The main advantage of perturbation theory is that the UV cutoff Λ can be removed exactly and independently of the properties of the coupling flow. The existence of a Λ → ∞ limit with the required Properties (PTC1) can often be rigorously proven, in contrast to most nonperturbative techniques where this can only be established approximately by assembling evidence. With Criterion (PTC1) satisfied, the coupling flow then can be studied in a second step and used to probe whether or not the Criterion (PTC2) for the existence of a genuine continuum limit as anticipated in Section 1.3 is also satisfied. The main disadvantage of perturbation theory is that everything is initially defined as a formal power series in the loop counting parameter. Even if one trades the latter for a running coupling, the series in this coupling remains a formal one, typically nonconvergent and not Borelsummable. It is generally believed, however, that provided Criterion (PTC2) is satisfied for a perturbative Gaussian fixed point, the series is asymptotic to the (usually unknown) exact result. In this case the perturbative analysis should indicate the existence of a genuine continuum limit based on an underlying Gaussian fixed point proper. Our main reason for going through this in some detail below is to point out that in a situation with several couplings the very same rationale applies if the perturbative fixed point is a nonGaussian rather than a Gaussian one.
As mentioned, in perturbation theory one initially only aims at defining the expectations (A.1) as a formal power series in the loop counting parameter λ, where the sum of all ℓloop contributions to a quantity is assigned a factor λ^{ℓ}. For the reasons explained in [106] the loop expansion does not necessarily coincide with an expansion in powers of Planck’s constant ħ. For example when massless fields are involved, 1loop diagrams can contribute to the classical limit O(ħ^{0}). The loop counting parameter λ refers to a set of free fields of mass μ such that the formal expansion of the exponential in Equation (A.1) gives expectations whose computation can be reduced to the evaluation of Gaussians. We denote the (quadratic) action of this set of free fields by S_{*},_{μ}[χ]. The interaction is described by a set of monomials P_{i}[χ], i ∈ E_{p.c.}, which are “power counting renormalizable”. The latter means that their mass dimension −d_{i} is such that d_{i} ≥ 0. It is also assumed that the P_{i} are functionally independent, so that the corresponding couplings are essential. The socalled “bare” action functional then is \({S_\Lambda} = {S_{\ast}},\mu + \sum\nolimits_{i \in E{\rm{p}}.c.} {{u_i}\left(\Lambda \right){P_i}}\), where u_{i}(Λ) are the essential “bare” couplings (including masses) corresponding to the interaction monomials P_{i}[χ]. Inessential parameters are generated by subjecting S_{λ} to a suitable class of field redefinitions. In more detail one writes
Here u_{i}(μ) are the renormalized couplings which are Λindependent and the V_{i}(u(μ), Λ, μ) are counterterms which diverge in the limit Λ → ∞. This divergence is enforced by very general properties of QFTs. Similarly the χ_{μ} are called renormalized fields and the Ξ_{ℓ}(χ_{μ};u(μ), Λ, μ) are local functionals of the χ_{μ} with coefficients depending on u(μ), Λ, μ; the coefficients again diverge in the limit Λ → ∞. Often one aims at “multiplicative renormalizability”, which means the ansatz for the Ξ_{ℓ} is taken to be linear in the fields Ξ_{ℓ}(χ_{μ}; u(μ), Λ, μ) = Z_{ℓ}(u(μ), Λ, μ)χ_{μ} and Z_{ℓ} is the ℓloop “wave function renormalization” constant. One should emphasize, however, that multiplicative renormalizability can often not be achieved, and even in field theories where it can be achieved, it evidently will work only with a particular choice of field coordinates (see [41] for a discussion).
The normalizations in Equation (2.1) can be chosen such that u_{i}(μ = Λ) = u_{i}(Λ) and χ_{μ=Λ} = χ_{λ}, but one is really interested in the regime where μ ≪ Λ. Inserting these parameterizations into S_{λ}[χ_{λ}] gives an expression of the form
where the sum over α includes terms of the form appearing on the righthandside of Equation (A.8). Often the μdependence in the fields can be traded for one carried by (inessential) parameters z_{i}(μ), i ∈ I. Then Equation (2.2) takes the form \({S_\Lambda}\left[ {{{\rm{\chi}}_\Lambda}} \right]=\sum\nolimits_{{\alpha\prime}} {{u_{{\alpha\prime}}}\left({g\left(\mu \right),z\left(\mu \right),\Lambda, \mu} \right){P_{{\alpha\prime}}}} \left[ {\rm{\chi}} \right]\), with some μindependent fields, \({\rm{\chi}} = {{\rm{\chi}}_{{\mu _0}}}\), say. The righthandside clearly resembles Equation (A.7) with the difference that modulo field redefinitions only power counting renormalizable interaction monomials occur.
So far the counterterms in Equation (2.1) have been left unspecified. The point of introducing them is of course as a means to absorb the cutoff dependence generated by the regularized functional integral in Equation (A.1). Specifically, one replaces the Boltzmann factor by its power series expansion in λ, i.e. exp{−S_{λ}[χ_{λ}]} = exp{−S_{*,μ}[χ_{μ}]}(1 + ∑_{ℓ≥1} λ^{ℓ}Q_{ℓ}[χ_{μ}]), and aims at an evaluation of multipoint functions 〈χ_{λ}(x_{1}) … χ_{Λ}(x_{n})〉S_{Λ} as formal power series in λ. After inserting Equation (2.1) and the expansion of \({e^{ S\Lambda [{{\rm{\chi}}_\Lambda}]}}\) this reduces the problem to an evaluation of the free multipoint functions 〈χ_{μ}(x_{1}) … χ_{μ}(x_{n})Q_{l}[χ_{μ}]〉S_{*,μ} computed with the quadratic action S_{*,μ} on the field space with cutoff Λ. The free multipoint functions will contain contributions which diverge in the limit Λ → ∞. On the other hand via the parameterization (2.1, 2.2) the coefficients carry an adjustable Λ dependence. In a renormalizable QFT the Λ dependence in the coefficients can be chosen such as to cancel (for μ ≪ Λ) that generated by the multipoint functions 〈χμ(x_{1}) … χ_{μ}(x_{n})Q_{l}[χ_{μ}]〉S_{*,μ}. With this adjustment the limits
exist and define the renormalized multipoint functions. As indicated they can be interpreted as referring to the renormalized action lim_{Λ→∞} S_{λ}[χ_{λ}] = S_{μ}[χ_{μ}]. Equation (2.3) highlights the main advantage of renormalized perturbation theory: The existence of the infinite cutoff limit (2.3) is often a provable property of the system, while this is not the case for most nonperturbative techniques. In the terminology introduced in Section 1.3 the Criterion (PTC1) is then satisfied. In order for this to be indicative for the existence of a genuine continuum limit, however, the additional Condition (PTC2) must be satisfied, whose rationale we proceed to discuss now.
Since the renormalization scale μ is arbitrary, changing its value must not affect the values of observables. The impact of a change in μ can most readily be determined from Equation (2.1). The lefthandsides are μ independent, so by differentiating these relations with respect to μ and extracting the coefficients in a power series in (say) Λ and/or log Λ consistency conditions arise for the derivatives \(\mu {d \over {d\mu}}{\mu _i}\) and \(\mu {d \over {d\mu}}{{\rm{\chi}}_\mu}\). The ones obtained from the leading order are the most interesting relations. For the couplings one obtains a system of ordinary differential equations which define their renormalization flow under a change of μ. As usual it is convenient to work with dimensionless couplings \({{\rm{g}}_i}: = {u_i}{\mu ^{ {d_i}}}\), where d_{i} is the mass dimension of u_{i}. The flow equations then take the form
where the β_{i} are the perturbative beta functions. The flow equations for the renormalized fields are familiar only in the case of multiplicatively renormalizable fields, where one can work with scale independent fields and have the scale dependence carried by the wave function renormalization constant. In general however the fields are scale dependent. For example this ensures that the renormalized action evaluated on the renormalized fields is scale independent: \(\mu {d \over {d\mu}}{S_\mu}\left[ {{{\rm{\chi}}_\mu}} \right] = 0\).
By construction the perturbative beta functions have a fixed point at \({\rm{g}}_i^{\ast} = 0\), which is called the perturbative Gaussian fixed point. Nothing prevents them from having other fixed points, but the Gaussian one is built into the construction. This is because a free theory has vanishing beta functions and the couplings \({{\rm{g}}_i} = {u_i}{\mu ^{ {d_i}}}\) have been introduced to parameterize the deviations from the free theory with action S_{*,μ}. Not surprisingly the stability matrix Θ_{ij} = ∂β_{i}/∂g_{j}∣_{g*=0} of the perturbative Gaussian fixed point just reproduces the information which has been put in. The eigenvalues come out to be −d_{i} modulo corrections in the loop coupling parameter, where −d_{i} are the mass dimensions of the corresponding interaction monomials. For the eigenvectors one finds a onetoone correspondence to the unit vectors in the ‘coupling direction’ g_{i}, again with power corrections in the loop counting parameter. One sees that the couplings u_{i} not irrelevant with respect to the stability matrix Θ computed at the perturbative Gaussian fixed point are the ones with mass dimensions d_{i} ≥ 0, i.e. just the power counting renormalizable ones.
The attribute “perturbative Gaussian” indicates that whenever in a nonperturbative construction of the renormalization flow in the same ‘basis’ of interaction monomials \({\rm{g}}_i^{\ast} = 0\) is also a fixed point (called the Gaussian fixed point), the perturbatively defined expectations are believed to provide an asymptotic (nonconvergent) expansion to the expectations defined nonperturbatively based on the Gaussian fixed point, schematically
Here \({\left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle _\ell}\) is the perturbatively computed ℓloop contribution after a socalled renormalization group improvement. Roughly speaking the latter amounts to the following procedure: One assigns to the loop counting parameter λ a numerical value (ultimately related to the value of Planck’s constant in the chosen units; see however [106]) and solves \(\mu {{d{{\rm{g}}_i}} \over {d\mu}}{\beta _i}\left({g\left(\mu \right)} \right)\)) as an ordinary differential equation. One of the functions obtained, say g_{1}(μ), is used to eliminate λ in favor of μ and an integration constant Λ_{beta} (not to be confused with the cutoff, which is gone for good). So \({\left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle _L}: = {\sum\nolimits_{\ell \leq L} {\bar \lambda \left({\mu, {\Lambda _{{\rm{beta}}}}} \right)} ^\ell}{\left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle _{\ell, \mu}}\) at this point carries a twofold μdependence, the one which comes out of the renormalization procedure (2.3) and the one carried now by λ(μ, Λ_{beta}). For an observable quantity \({\mathcal O}\) both dependencies cancel out, modulo terms of higher order, leaving behind a dependence on the integration constant Λ_{beta}. We write \({\left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle _L}\left({{\Lambda _{{\rm{beta}}}}} \right)\) to indicate this dependence. One then uses the expectation of one, suitably chosen, observable \({{\mathcal O}_0}\) to match its value \(\left\langle {{{\mathcal O}_0}} \right\rangle\) (measured or otherwise known) with that of \({\left\langle {{{\mathcal O}_0}} \right\rangle _L}\left({{\Lambda _{{\rm{beta}}}}} \right)\) to a given small loop order L (typically not larger than 2). For a well chosen \({{{\mathcal O}_0}}\) this allows one to replace Λ_{beta} by a physical mass scale m_{phys}. Eliminating Λ_{beta} in favor of m_{phys} gives the perturbative predictions for all other observables. Apart from residual scheme dependencies (which are believed to be numerically small) this defines the righthandside of Equation (2.5) unambigously as a functional over the observables.
Nevertheless, except for some special cases, it is difficult to give a mathematically precise meaning to the ‘∼’ in Equation (2.5). Ideally one would be able to prove that perturbation theory is asymptotic to the (usually unknown) exact answer for the same quantity. For lattice theories on a finite lattice this is often possible; the problems start when taking the limit of infinite lattice size (see [159] for a discussion). In the continuum limit a proof that perturbation theory is asymptotic has been achieved in a number of lowdimensional quantum field theories: the superrenormalizable P_{2}(ϕ) and \(\phi _3^4\) theories [69, 43] and the twodimensional GrossNeveu model, where the correlation functions are the Borel sum of their renormalized perturbation expansion [87, 89]. Strong evidence for the asymptotic correctness of perturbation theory has also been obtained in the O(3) nonlinear sigmamodel via the form factor bootstrap [22]. In four or higherdimensional theories unfortunately no such results are available. It is still believed that whenever the above g_{1} is asymptotically free in perturbation theory, that the corresponding series is asymptotic to the unknown exact answer. On the other hand, to the best of our knowledge, a serious attempt to establish the asymptotic nature of the expansion has never been made, nor are plausible strategies available. The pragmatic attitude usually adopted is to refrain from the attempt to theoretically understand the domain of applicability of perturbation theory. Instead one interprets the ‘∼’ in Equation (2.5) as an approximate numerical equality, to a suitable loop order L and in a benign scheme, as long as it works, and attributes larger discrepancies to the ‘onset of nonperturbative physics’. This is clearly unsatisfactory, but often the best one can do. Note also that some of the predictive power of the QFT considered is wasted by this procedure and that it amounts to a partial immunization of perturbative predictions against (experimental or theoretical) refutation.
So far the discussion was independent of the nature of the running of \(\bar \lambda (\mu, {\Lambda _{{\rm{beta}}}})\) (which was traded for g_{1}). The chances that the vague approximate relation ‘∼’ in Equation (2.5) can be promoted to the status of an asymptotic expansion are of course way better if \(\bar \lambda (\mu, {\Lambda _{{\rm{beta}}}})\) is driven towards \(\bar \lambda = 0\) by the perturbative flow. Only then is it reasonable to expect that an asymptotic relation of the form (2.5) holds, linking the perturbative Gaussian fixed point to a genuine Gaussian fixed point defined by nonperturbative means. The perturbatively and the nonperturbatively defined coupling g_{1} can then be identified asymptotically and lie in the unstable manifold of the fixed point g_{1} = 0. On the other hand the existence of a Gaussian fixed point with a nontrivial unstable manifold is thought to entail the existence of a genuine continuum limit in the sense discussed before. In summary, if g_{1} is traded for a running \(\bar \lambda (\mu, {\Lambda _{{\rm{beta}}}})\), a perturbative criterion for the existence of a genuine continuum limit is that the perturbative flow of g_{1} is regular with lim_{μ→∞}g_{1}(μ) = 0. Since the beta functions of the other couplings are formal power series in λ without constant coefficients, the other couplings will vanish likewise as g1 → 0, and one recovers the local quadratic action S_{*,μ}[χ] at the fixed point. The upshot is that the coupling with respect to which the perturbative expansion is performed should be asymptotically free in perturbation theory in order to render the existence of a nonperturbative continuum limit plausible.
The reason for going through this discussion is to highlight that is applies just as well to a perturbative nonGaussian fixed point. This sounds like a contradiction in terms, but it is not. Suppose that in a situation with several couplings g_{1}, …, g_{n} the perturbative beta functions (which are formal power series in λ without constant coefficients) admit a nontrivial zero, \({\rm{g}}_1^{\ast}(\lambda), \ldots, {\rm{g}}_n^{\ast}(\lambda)\). Suppose in addition that all the couplings lie in the unstable manifold of that zero, i.e. the flows g_{i}(μ) are regular and \({\lim\nolimits_{\mu \to \infty}}{{\rm{g}}_i}(\mu) = {\rm{g}}_i^{\ast}\). We shall call a coupling with this property asymptotically safe, so that the additional assumption is that all couplings are asymptotically safe. As before one must assign λ a numerical value in order to define the flow. Since the series in λ anyhow has zero radius of convergence, the ‘smallness’ of λ is not offhand a measure for the reliability of the perturbative result (the latter intuition in fact precisely presupposes Equation (2.5)). Any one of the deviations \(\delta {{\rm{g}}_i} = {{\rm{g}}_i}  {\rm{g}}_i^{\ast}\), which is of order λ at some μ can be used as well to parameterize the original loop expansion. By a relabeling or reparameterization of the couplings we may assume that this is the case for δg_{1}. The original loop expansion can then be rearranged to read \({\sum\nolimits_{\ell \geq 0} {\left({\delta {g_1}} \right)} ^\ell}{\left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle _\ell}\). However, if there is an underlying nonperturbative structure at all, it is reasonable to assume that it refers to a nonGaussian fixed point,
The rationale for Equation (2.6) is exactly the same as for Equation (2.5). What matters is not the value of the couplings at a perturbative fixed point, but their flow pattern. For a nontrivial fixed point the couplings \({\rm{g}}_i^{\ast}\) in the above basis of interaction monomials are nonzero, but any one of the deviations \(\delta {{\rm{g}}_i} = {{\rm{g}}_i}  {\rm{g}}_i^{\ast}\) can be made arbitrarily small as μ → ∞. The relation ‘∼’ in Equation (2.6) then again plausibly amounts to an asymptotic expansion for the unknown exact answer, where the latter this time is based on a nonGaussian fixed point.
Summarizing: In perturbation theory the removal of the cutoff can be done independently of the properties of the coupling flow, while in a nonperturbative setting both aspects are linked. Only if the coupling flow computed from the perturbative beta functions meets certain conditions is it reasonable to assume that there exists an underlying nonperturbative framework to whose results the perturbative series is asymptotic. Specifically we formulate the following criterion:
Criterion (Continuum limit via perturbation theory):

(PTC1) Existence of a formal continuum limit, i.e. removal of the UV cutoff is possible and the renormalized physical quantities are independent of the scheme and of the choice of interpolating fields, all in the sense of formal power series in the loop counting parameter.

(PTC2) The perturbative beta functions have a Gaussian or a nonGaussian fixed point and the dimension of its unstable manifold (as computed from the perturbative beta functions) equals the number of independent essential couplings. Equivalently, all essential couplings are asymptotically safe in perturbation theory.
2.2 Functional flow equations and UV renormalization
The technique of functional renormalization group equations (FRGEs) does not rely on a perturbative expansion and has been widely used for the computation of critical exponents and the flow of generalized couplings. For a systematic exposition of this technique and its applications we refer to the reviews [146, 21, 166, 229, 29]. Here we shall mainly use the effective average action Γ_{k} and its ‘exact’ FRGE. We refer to Appendix C for a summary of this formulation, and discuss in this section how the UV renormalization problem presents itself in an FRGE [157].
In typical applications of the FRG the ultraviolet renormalization problem does not have to be addressed. In the context of the asymptotic safety scenario this is different. By definition the perturbative series in a field theory based on an asymptotically safe functional measure has a dependence on the UV cutoff which is not strictly renormalizable (see Section 1.3). The perturbative expansion of an FRGE must reproduce the structure of these divergencies. On the other hand in an exact treatment or based on different approximation techniques a reshuffling of the cutoff dependence is meant to occur which allows for a genuine continuum limit. We therefore outline here how the UV renormalization problem manifests itself in the framework of the functional flow equations. The goal will be to formulate a criterion for the plausible existence of a genuine continuum limit in parallel to the one above based on perturbative indicators.
Again we illustrate the relevant issues for a scalar quantum field theory on flat space. For definiteness we consider here the flow equation for the effective average action Γ_{λ,k}[ϕ], for other types of FRGEs the discussion is similar though. The effective average action interpolates between the bare action S_{λ}[ϕ] and the above, initially regulated, effective action Γ_{λ}, according to
Roughly speaking one should think of Γ_{λ,k}[ϕ] as the conventional effective action but with only the momentum modes in the range k^{2} < p^{2} < Λ^{2} integrated out. The k − Λ limit in Equation (2.7) will in fact differ from S_{λ} by a 1loop determinant ln \(\det [S_\Lambda ^{(2)} + {{\mathcal R}_\Lambda}]\) (see Appendix C.2). For the following discussion the difference is inessential and for (notational) simplicity we will identify Γ_{λ,λ} with S_{λ}. Equation (2.7) also presupposes that for fixed UV cutoff Λ the limit k − 0 exists, which for theories with massless degrees of freedom is nontrivial.
The conventional effective action obeys a wellknown functional integrodifferential equation which implicitly defines it (see Equation (B.8) below). Its counterpart for Γ_{λ,k}[ϕ] reads
where the functional measure \({\left[ {{\mathcal D}{\rm{\chi}}} \right]_{\Lambda, k}}\) includes mostly momentum modes in the range k^{2} < p^{2} < Λ^{2}. This can be done by multiplying the kinematical measure by a suitable mode suppression factor
with a suitable quadratic form C_{Λ,k}. From Equation (2.8) one can also directly verify the alternative characterization (1.12).
The precise form of the mode suppression is inessential. In the following we outline a variant which is technically convenient. Here C_{Λ,k} is a quadratic form in the fields defined in terms of a kernel \({{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) chosen such that both \({{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) and \(k{\partial _k}{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) define integral operators of traceclass on the function space considered. We write \(\left[ {{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}{\rm{\chi}}} \right]\left(x \right): = \int {dy} \,{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\left({x,y} \right){\rm{\chi}}\left(y \right)\) for the integral operator and \({\rm{Tr}}\left[ {{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}} \right]: = \int {dx} \,{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\left({x,x} \right) < \infty\) for its trace. The other properties of the kernel are best described in Fourier space, where \({{{\mathcal R}_{k,\Lambda}}}\) acts as \(\left[ {{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}{\rm{\hat \chi}}} \right]\left(p \right): = \int {{{dy} \over {{{(2\pi)}^d}}}} \,{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\left({p,q} \right){\rm{\hat \chi}}\left(q \right)\), with \({\rm{\hat \chi}}\left({\rm{p}} \right) = \int {dx\,{\rm{\chi}}\,\left(x \right)\exp \left({ ipx} \right)}\), the Fourier transform of χ and similarly for the kernel (where we omit the hat for notational simplicity). The UV cutoff 0 ≤ p^{2} < Λ renders Euclidean momentum space compact and Mercer’s theorem then provides simple sufficient conditions for an integral operator to be traceclass [157]. We thus take the kernel \({{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\left({p,q} \right)\) to be smooth, symmetric in p, q, and such that
for all continuous functions χ (similarly for \(k{\partial _k}{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\left({p,q} \right)\)). The traceclass condition is then satisfied and one can adjust the other features of the kernel to account for the mode suppression. These features are arbitrary to some extent; what matters is the limiting behavior for p^{2}, q^{2} ≫ k^{2} and (with foresight) Λ → ∞. We refer to Appendix C for more details.
The presence of the extra scale k allows one to convert Equation (2.8) into a functional differential equation [228, 229, 29],
known as the functional renormalization group equation (FRGE) for the effective average action. For convenience we include a quick derivation of Equation (2.11) in Appendix C. In the second line of Equation (2.11) we spelled out the trace using that \(k{\partial _k}{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) is traceclass. Further \(\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{(2)}\left[ \phi \right]\) is the integral operator whose kernel is the Hessian of the effective average action, i.e. \(\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{(2)}\left({x,y} \right): = {\delta ^2}{\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}}\left[ \phi \right]/\left({\delta \phi \left(x \right)\delta \phi \left(y \right)} \right)\), and \({{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) is the integral operator in Equation (2.8).
For finite cutoffs (Λ, k) the trace of the righthandside of Equation (2.11) will exist as the potentially problematic high momentum parts are cut off. In slightly more technical terms, since the product of a traceclass operator with a bounded operator is again traceclass, the trace in Equation (2.11) is finite as long as the inverse of \(\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{(2)}\left[ \phi \right] + {{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) defines a bounded operator. For finite UV cutoff one sees from the momentum space version of Equation (B.2) in Section 3.4 that this will normally be the case. The traceclass property of the mode cutoff operator (for which Equation (2.10) is a sufficient condition) also ensures that the trace in Equation (2.11) can be evaluated in any basis, the momentum space variant displayed in the second line is just one convenient choice.
Importantly the FRGE (2.11) is independent of the bare action S_{λ}, which enters only via the initial condition Γ_{λ,λ} = S_{λ} (for large Λ). In the FRGE approach the calculation of the functional integral for Γ_{λ,k} is replaced by the task of integrating this RG equation from k = Λ, where the initial condition Γ_{λ,λ} = S_{λ} is imposed, down to k = 0, where the effective average action equals the ordinary effective action Γ_{λ}.
All this has been for a fixed UV cutoff Λ. The removal of the cutoff is of course the central theme of UV renormalization. In the FRG formulation one has to distinguish between two aspects: first, removal of the explicit Λ dependence in the trace on the righthandside of Equation (2.11), and second removal of the UV cutoff in Γ_{λ,k} itself, which was needed in order to make the original functional integral welldefined.
The first aspect is unproblematic: The trace is manifestly finite as long as the inverse of \(\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{(2)}\left[ \phi \right] + {{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) defines a bounded operator. If now \(\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{(2)}\left[ \phi \right]\) is independently known to have a finite and nontrivial limit as Λ → ∞, the explicit Λ dependence carried by the \({{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) term is harmless and the trace always exists. Roughly this is because the derivative kernel \(k{\partial _k}{{\mathcal R}_{\Lambda, k}}\) has support mostly on a thin shell around p^{2} ≈ k^{2}, so that the (potentially problematic) large p behavior of the other factor is irrelevant (cf. Appendix C.2).
The second aspect of course relates to the traditional UV renormalization problem. Since Γ_{λ,k} came from a regularized functional integral it will develop the usual UV divergencies as one attempts to send Λ to infinity. The remedy is to carefully adjust the bare action S_{λ}[ϕ] — that is, the initial condition for the FRGE (2.11) — in such a way that functional integral — viz. the solution of the FRGE — is asymptotically independent of Λ. Concretely this could be done by finetuning the way how the parameters u_{α}(Λ) in the expansion S_{λ}[χ] = ∑_{α} u_{α}(Λ)P_{α}[χ] depends on Λ. However the FRGE method in itself provides no means to find the proper initial functional S_{λ}[χ]. Identification of the finetuned S_{λ}[χ] lies at the core of the UV renormalization problem, irrespective of whether Γ_{λ,k} is defined directly via the functional integral or via the FRGE. Beyond perturbation theory the only known techniques to identify the proper S_{λ} start directly from the functional integral and are ‘constructive’ in spirit (see [195, 48]). Unfortunately fourdimensional quantum field theories of interest are still beyond constructive control.
One may also ask whether perhaps the cutoffdependent FRGE (2.11) itself can be used to show that a limit lim_{Λ→∞} Γ_{Λ,k}[ϕ] exists. Indeed using other FRGEs and a perturbative ansatz for the solution has lead to economic proofs of perturbative renormalizability, i.e. of the existence of a formal continuum limit in the sense of Criterion (PTC1) discussed before (see [200, 123]). Unfortunately so far this could not be extended to construct a nonperturbative continuum limit of fully fledged quantum field theories (see [145] for a recent review of such constructive uses of FRGEs). For the time being one has to be content with the following if…then statement:
If there exists a sequence of initial actions \({S_{n\Lambda 0}}\left[ {\rm{\chi}} \right],\,n \in {\mathbb N}\), n ∈ ℕ, such that the solution \({\Gamma _{n\Lambda 0}},k\left[ \phi \right]\) of the FRGE (2.11) remains finite as n → ∞, then the limit \({\Gamma _k}\left[ \phi \right]: = {\lim\nolimits_{n \to \infty}}{\Gamma _{n{\Lambda _0}}}{,_k}\left[ \phi \right]\) has to obey the cutoff independent FRGE
Conversely, under the above premise, this equation should have at least one solution with a finite limit lim_{k→∞} Γ_{k} [ϕ]. This limit can now be identified with the renormalized fixed point action S_{*}[χ]. It is renormalized because by construction the cutoff dependencies have been eaten up by the ones produced by the trace in Equation (2.11). It can be identified with a fixed point action because lowering k amounts to coarse graining, and S_{*}[χ] is the ‘inverse limit’ of a sequence of such coarse graining steps.
So far the positivity or unitarity requirement has not been discussed. From the (OsterwalderSchrader or Wightman) reconstruction theorems it is known how the unitarity of a quantum field theory on a flat spacetime translates into nonlinear conditions on the multipoint functions. Since the latter can be expressed in terms of the functional derivatives of Γ_{k}, unitarity can in principle be tested retroactively, and is expected to hold only in the limit k → 0. Unfortunately this is a very indirect and retroactive criterion. One of the roles of the bare action S_{Λ}[χ] = Γ_{λ,λ}[χ] is to encode properties which are likely to ensure the desired properties of lim_{k→0} Γ_{k} [ϕ]. In theories with massless degrees of freedom the k → 0 limit is nontrivial and the problem of gaining computational control over the infrared physics should be separated from the UV aspects of the continuum limit as much as possible. However the k → 0 limit is essential to probe stability/positivity/unitarity.
One aspect of positivity is the convexity of the effective action. The functional equations (2.11, 2.12) do in itself “not know” that Γ_{k} is the Legendre transform of a convex functional and hence must be itself convex. Convexity must therefore enter through the inital data and it will also put constraints on the choice of the mode cutoffs. Good mode cutoffs are characterized by the fact that \(\Gamma _k^{(2)} + {{\mathcal R}_k}\) has positive spectral values for all k (cf. Equation (C.14)). If no blowup occurs in the flow the limit \({\lim\nolimits_{k \to \infty}}\Gamma _k^{(2)}\) will then also have nonnegative spectrum. Of course this presupposes again that the proper initial conditions have been identified and the role of the bare action is as above.
For flat space quantum field theories one expects that S_{λ}[χ] must be local, i.e. a differential polynomial of finite order in the fields so as to end up with an effective action \({\lim\nolimits_{k \to \infty}}{\lim\nolimits_{\Lambda \to \infty}}{\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}}[\phi ]\) describing a local/microcausal unitary quantum field theory.
For convenient reference we summarize these conclusions in the following criterion:
Criterion (Continuum limit in the functional RG approach):

(FRGC1) A solution of the cutoff independent FRGE (2.12) which exists globally in k (for all 0 ≤ k ≤ ∞) can reasonably be identified with the continuum limit of the effective average action lim_{Λ→∞} Γ_{λ,k} [ϕ] constructed by other means. For such a solution lim_{k→0} Γ_{k}[ϕ] is the full quantum effective action and lim_{k→∞} Γ_{k}[ϕ] = S_{*}[ϕ] is the fixed point action.

(FRGC2) For a unitary relativistic quantum field theory positivity/unitarity must be tested retroactively from the functional derivatives of lim_{k→0} Γ_{k}[ϕ].
We add some comments:
Since the FRGE (2.12) is a differential equation in k, an initial functional Γ_{initial}[ϕ] has to be specified for some 0 < k_{initial} ≤ ∞, to generate a local solution near k = k_{initial}. The point is that for ‘almost all’ choices of Γ_{initial}[ϕ] the local solution cannot be extended to all values of k. Finding the rare initial functionals for which this is possible is the FRGE counterpart of the UV renormalization problem. The existence of the k → 0 limit is itself not part of the UV problem; in conventional quantum field theories the k → 0 limit is however essential to probe unitarity/positivity/stability.
It is presently not known whether the above criterion can be converted into a theorem. Suppose for a quantum field theory on the lattice (with lattice spacing Λ^{−1}) the effective action \(\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{{\rm{latt}}}[\phi ]\) has been constructed nonperturbatively from a transfer operator satisfying reflection positivity and that a continuum limit \({\lim\nolimits_{\Lambda \to \infty}}\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{{\rm{latt}}}[\phi ]\) is assumed to exist. Does it coincide with a solution Γ_{k}[ϕ] of Equation (2.12) satisfying the Criteria (FRGC1) and (FRGC2)? Note that this is ‘only’ a matter of controlling the limit, for finite Λ also \(\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{{\rm{latt}}}\) will satisfy the flow equation (2.11).
For an application to quantum gravity one will initially only ask for Criterion (FRGC1), perhaps with even only a partial understanding of the k → 0 limit. As mentioned, the k → 0 limit should also be related to positivity issues. The proper positivity requirement replacing Criterion (FRGC2) yet has to be found, however some constraint will certainly be needed. Concerning Criterion (FRGC1) the premise in the if…then statement preceeding Equation (2.12) has to be justified by external means or taken as a working hypothesis. In principle one can also adopt the viewpoint that the quantum gravity counterpart of Equation (2.12) discussed in Section 4 simply defines the effective action for quantum gravity whenever a solution meets Criterion (FRGC1). The main drawback with this proposal is that it makes it difficult to include information concerning Criterion (FRGC2). However difficult and roundabout a functional integral construction is, it allows one to incorporate ‘other’ desirable features of the system in a relatively transparent way.
We shall therefore also in the application to quantum gravity assume that a solution Γ_{k} of the cutoff independent FRGE (2.12) satisfying Criterion (FRGC1) comes from an underlying functional integral. This amounts to the assumption that the renormalization problem for Γ_{k,Λ} defined in terms of a functional integral can be solved and that the limit lim_{Λ→∞} Γ_{k,Λ} can be identified with Γ_{k}. This is of course a rather strong hypothesis, however its selfconsistency can be tested within the FRG framework.
To this end one truncates the space of candidate continuum functionals \(\Gamma _{k}^{{\rm{trunc}}}[\phi ]\) to one where the initial value problem for the flow equation (2.12) can be solved in reasonably closed form. One can then by ‘direct inspection’ determine the initial data for which a global solution exists. Convexity of the truncated \({\lim\nolimits_{k \to 0}}\Gamma _k^{{\rm{trunc}}}[\phi ]\) can serve as guideline to identify good truncations. If the set of these initial data forms a nontrivial unstable manifold of the fixed point \(S_{\ast}^{{\rm{trunc}}}[\phi ] = {\lim\nolimits_{k \to \infty}}\Gamma _k^{{\rm{trunc}}}[\phi ]\), application of the above criterion suggests that \(\Gamma _k^{{\rm{trunc}}}\) can approximately be identified with the projection of the continuum limit (lim_{Λ→∞} Γ_{λ,k})^{trunc} of some Γ_{λ,k} computed by other means. The identification can only be an approximate one because in the \(\Gamma _k^{{\rm{trunc}}}\) evolution one first truncates and then evolves in k, while in (lim_{Λ→∞} Γ_{λ,k} [ϕ])^{trunc} one first evolves in k and then truncates. Alternatively one can imagine to have replaced the original dynamics by some ‘hierarchical’ (for want of a better term) approximation implicitly defined by the property that \({\left({{{\lim}_{\Lambda \to \infty}}\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{{\rm{hier}}}[\phi ]} \right)^{{\rm{trunc}}}} = {\lim\nolimits_{\Lambda, k}}\Gamma _{\Lambda, k}^{{\rm{hier}}}[\phi ]\) (see [75] for the relation between a hierarchical dynamics and the local potential approximation). The existence of an UV fixed point with a nontrivial unstable manifold for \(\Gamma _k^{{\rm{trunc}}}\) can then be taken as witnessing the renormalizability of the ‘hierarchical’ dynamics.
2.3 Towards Quantum Gravidynamics
The application of renormalization group ideas to quantum gravity has a long history. In accordance with the previous discussion, we focus here on the aspects needed to explain the apparent mismatch between the perturbative nonrenormalizability and the presumed nonperturbative renormalizability. In fact, when looking at higher derivative theories renormalizability can already be achieved on a perturbative level in several instructive ways.
2.3.1 The role of Newton’s constant
Before turning to renormalization aspects proper, let us describe the special role of Newton’s constant in a diffeomorphism invariant theory with a dynamical metric. Let S[g, matter] be any local action, where g = (g_{αβ})_{1≤α,β≤d} is the metric and the “matter” fields are not scaled when the metric is. Scale changes in the metric then give rise to a variation of the Lagrangian which vanishes on shell:
As a consequence one of the coupling parameters which in the absence of gravity would be essential (i.e. a genuine coupling) becomes inessential (i.e. can be changed at will by a redefinition of the fields). The running of this parameter, like that of a wave function renormalization constant, has no direct significance. If the pure gravity part contains the usual Ricci scalar term \({Z_{\rm{N}}}\sqrt g R(g)\), the parameter that becomes inessential may be taken as its prefactor, i.e. may be identified with the inverse of Newton’s constant, via
The normalization factor c_{d}, d ≥ 4 [196], is chosen such that the coefficient in the nonrelativistic force law, as computed from \({Z_{\rm{N}}}\sqrt g R(g) + {L_{{\rm{matter}}}}\), equals G_{Newton} Vol(S^{d−2}). For d = 2, 3 a different normalization has to be adopted.
The physics interpretation of the inessential parameter ω is that it also sets the absolute momentum or spectral scale. To see this we can think of g_{αβ} as a reference metric in the background field formalism. For example for the spectral values ν(g) of the covariant Laplacian Δ_{g} associated with g_{αβ} one has
since \({\Delta _{{\omega ^2}g}} = {\omega ^{ 2}}{\Delta _g}\). The spectral values play the role of a covariant momentum squared. Indeed, if the metric is taken dimensionless, ν(g) carries dimension 2 (since Δ_{g} does) and for a flat metric g_{αβ} = η_{αβ} they reduce to −ν(η) = k^{2}, for plane waves labeled by k. From Equation (2.15) one sees that rescaling of the metric and rescaling of the spectral values amout to the same thing. Since the former parameter is inessential the latter is too. Hence in a theory with a dynamical metric the three (conceptually distinct) inessential parameters — overall scale of the metric ω, the inverse of Newton’s constant \(Z_{\rm{N}}^{ 1} = {c_d}{G_{{\rm{Newton}}}}\), and the overall normalization of the spectral/momentum values — are in onetoone correspondence. For definiteness we take Newton’s constant as the variant under consideration.
Being inessential the quantum field theoretical running of G_{Newton} has significance only relative to the running coefficient of some reference operator. The most commonly used choice is a cosmological constant term \(\Lambda \int {dx\sqrt g}\). Indeed
is dimensionless and invariant under constant rescalings of the metric [116]. One usually switches to dimensionless parameters via
where μ is some dimension one parameter which will be taken as ‘renormalization group time’. The EinsteinHilbert action then reads
Being dimensionless one expects the running of g_{N}(μ) and λ(μ) to be governed by flow equations without explicit μ dependence
For the essential parameter τ(μ) = g_{N}(μ)λ(μ)^{(d−2)/2} obtained from Equation (2.16) this gives
Within an asympotically safe Quantum Gravidynamics this should be an asymptotically safe coupling, i.e.
where here 0 < τ_{*} < ∞. Given Equation (2.21) there are two possibilities. First, the various scheme choices are such that the parameters g_{N}(μ) and λ(μ) are both nonsingular and approach finite values g_{*} and λ_{*} for μ → ∞. Second, the scheme choices are such that one of them becomes singular and the other vanishes for μ → ∞. Usually the first possibility is chosen; then the g_{N}(μ) flow defined by the first equation in Equation (2.19) has all the properties required for an essential asymptotically safe coupling. This ‘nonsingular parametric representation’ of the τ(μ) coupling flow is advantageous for most purposes.
The second possibility is realized when inserting a singular solution of the equation for g_{N}(μ) into the equation for λ(μ). This naturally occurs when working in Planck units. One makes use of the fact that an inessential parameter can be frozen at a prescribed value. Specifically fixing
amounts to working with Planck units. From Equation (2.17) it then follows that
We may assume that the second equation has a local solution g_{N}(μ) = f(λ, μ/M_{P1}). Reinserting into the λ equation gives a flow equation
which now explicitly depends on μ. Writing similarly \({{\tilde \tau}_{\ast}}: = {\tau _{\ast}}\left({f\left({\lambda, \mu/{M_{{\rm{P1}}}}} \right),\lambda} \right)\) the condition defining the τ(μ) fixed point becomes
Both formulations are mathematically equivalent to the extent the inversion formula g_{N}(μ) = f(λ, μ/M_{P1}) is globally defined. For definiteness we considered here the cosmological constant term as a reference operator, but the principle clearly generalizes.
2.3.2 Perturbation theory and higher derivative theories
By higher derivative theories we mean here gravitational theories whose bare action contains, in addition to the EinsteinHilbert term, scalars built from powers of the Riemann tensor and its covariant derivatives. In overview there are two distinct perturbative treatments of such theories.
The first one, initiated by Stelle [206], uses 1/p^{4} type propagators (in four dimensions) in which case a higher derivative action containing all (three) quartic derivative terms can be expected to be power counting renormalizable. In this case strict renormalizability with only 4 (or 5, if Newton’s constant is included) couplings can be achieved [206]. However the 1/p^{4} type propagators are problematic from the point of view of unitarity.
An alternative perturbative treatment of higher derivative theories was first advocated by GomisWeinberg [94]. The idea is to try to maintain a 1/p^{2} type propagator and include all (infinitely many) counterterms generated in the bare action. Consistency requires that quadratic counterterms (those which contribute to the propagator) can be absorbed by field redefinitions. As shown by Anselmi [10] this is the case either in the absence of a cosmological constant term or when the background spacetime admits a metric with constant curvature.
We now present both of these perturbative treatments in more detail. A putative matching to a nonperturbative renormalization flow is outlined in Equation (2.32).
The general classical action in d dimensions containing up to four derivatives of the metric reads
Here C^{2} is the square of the Weyl tensor, E is the integrand of the GaussBonnet term, and a total derivative term ∇^{2}R has been omitted. The sign of the C^{2} coupling, s > 0, is fixed by the requirement that the Euclidean functional integral is damping. The metric is Euclidean to facilitate comparison with the original literature. The parameterization of the coefficients by couplings s, ω, θ is chosen for later convenience; we follow the conventions of [59]. The parameters in the second line are related to those in the first by
In d = 4 the GaussBonnet term is negligible; however if dimensional regularization is used, d ≠ 4, it is crucial to keep the term. For d = 3 both E and C^{2} vanish.
The perturbative quantization of Equation (2.26) proceeds as usual. Gauge fixing and ghost terms are added and the total action is expanded in powers of h_{αβ} = g_{αβ} − δ_{αβ}. Due to the crucial C^{2} term the gaugefixed propagator read off from the quadratic part of the full action has a characteristic 1/p^{4} falloff in d = 4,
where m is the mass of a “wrong sign” propagating spin 2 mode [206, 207]. Also spin 0 modes with the “wrong sign” may occur depending on the coefficient of the R^{2} term [207, 49]. The oneloop counterterm (minus the divergent part of the effective action) has been computed by a number of authors using different regularizations: dimensional regularization [59, 19], proper time cutoff [83], zeta function [18]. The resulting oneloop flow equations in d = 4 for s, ω, θ are agreed upon and read
These equations have a trivial fixed point s_{*} = 0, ω_{*} = const, θ_{*} = const, and a nontrivial fixed point s_{*} =0, \({\omega _{\ast}} =  \left({549 \pm 7\sqrt {6049}} \right)/200\), θ_{*} = 56/171. Importantly the C^{2} coupling s is asymptotically free.
To describe the flow of the Newton and cosmological constants one switches to the dimensionless parameters g_{N} and λ as in Section 2.3.1. The result obtained in BerrodoPeixoto and Shapiro [59] via dimensional regularization reads in our conventions
The function γ_{1} depends on the choice of gauge, but in the combination (2.16), i.e. g_{N}λ here, it drops out. The somewhat surprising 1/g_{N} term in β_{λ} comes from a counterterm proportional to the volume but not to Λ. Observe that whenever γ_{1} is independent of g_{N} and s, the flow equations (2.20, 2.30) are compatible with the existence of a nonGaussian fixed point,
with λ_{*} unspecified. A recent study [54] uses a specific momentum space cutoff \({{\mathcal R}_k}\) and evaluates the Γ_{k} effective average action to one loop using known heat kernel coefficients. The resulting flow equations are of the above form with γ_{1} = γ_{1}(ω) = (83 + 70ω + 8ω^{2})/(18π); further two additional terms in β_{λ} are found which fix also the value of λ_{*} in terms of γ_{1}. The difference in these nonuniversal terms can be understood [54] from the fact that dimensional regularization discards quadratic and quartic divergencies, while a momentum space cutoff gives \({{\mathcal R}_k}\)dependent but nonzero results for their coefficients.
The flow equations (2.20, 2.30) of course also admit the Gaussian fixed point \({\rm{g}}_{\rm{N}}^{\ast} = 0 = \lambda\), and one may be tempted to identify the ‘realm’ of perturbation theory (PT) with the ‘expansion’ around a Gaussian fixed point. As explained in Section 2.1, however, the conceptual status of PT referring to a nonGaussian fixed point is not significantly different from that referring to a Gaussian fixed point. In other words there is no reason to take the perturbative nonGaussian fixed point (2.31) any less serious than the perturbative Gaussian one. This important point will reoccur in the framework of the 2 + 2 truncation in Section 3, where a nonGaussian fixed point is also identified by perturbative means.
The fact that a nonGaussian fixed point can already be identified in PT is important for several reasons. First, although the value of \({\rm{g}}_{\rm{N}}^{\ast}\) in Equation (2.31) is always nonuniversal, the anomalous dimension η_{N} = γ_{g}/g_{N} − 2 is exactly −2 at the fixed point (2.31). The general argument for the dimensional reduction of the residual interactions outlined after Equation (1.5) can thus already be based on PT alone! Second the result (2.31) suggests that the interplay between the perturbative and the nonperturbative dynamics might be similar to that of nonAbelian gauge theories, where the nonperturbative dynamics is qualitatively and quantitatively important mostly in the infrared.
It is instructive [157] to compare the perturbative oneloop flow (2.20, 2.30) with the linearization of the (g_{N}, λ) flow obtained from the FRGE framework described in Section 4. In the socalled EinsteinHilbert truncation using an optimed cutoff and a limiting version of the gaugefixing parameter, the ‘beta’ functions γ_{g}, β_{λ} reduce to ratios of polynomials in g_{N}, λ [136]. Upon expansion to quadratic order one finds
This is of the form (2.30) at s = 0 with γ_{1} = 1/(4π)^{2}, and two additional terms in the second equation. The nontrival fixed point for g_{N} remains of the form (2.31), while the one for λ is best seen in the τ = g_{N}λ evolution equation, \(\mu d\tau/d\mu = \left({1  8{\lambda ^2}} \right){\rm{g}}_{\rm{N}}^2/\left({48{{\left({4\pi} \right)}^4}} \right) + O\left({{\lambda ^3}{\rm{g}}_{\rm{N}}^2} \right)\).
The most important drawback of the perturbatively renormalizable theories based on Equation (2.26) are the problems with unitarity entailed by the propagator (2.28). As already mentioned these problem are absent in an alternative perturbative formulation where a 1/p^{2} type propagator is used throughout [94]. We now describe this construction in slightly more detail following the presentation in [10].
Starting from the d = 4 Lagrangian \( {1 \over {{c_d}{G_{\rm{N}}}}}\sqrt g R(g)\) without cosmological constant the oneloop divergencies come out in dimensional regularization as [210]
They can be removed in two different ways. One is by adding new couplings so that a higher derivative action of the form (2.26) arises with parameters
The renormalizability of the resulting theory is mostly due to the modified propagator which can be viewed as a resummed graviton propagator in a power series in z, y. The unphysical singularities are of order 1/z, 1/y. The second option to remove Equation (2.33) is by a singular field redefinition
This restores the original \(\sqrt g R(g)\) Lagrangian up to two and higher loop contributions. However this feature is specific to one loop. As shown in [95, 222] at two loops there is a divergence proportional to \({R_{\alpha \beta}}^{\gamma \delta}{R^{\alpha \beta}}_{\rho \sigma}{R^{\rho \sigma}}_{\gamma \delta}\), which cannot be absorbed by a field redefinition. A counterterm proportional to it must thus be added to \(\sqrt g R(g)\). Importantly, when reexpanded in powers of h_{αβ} = g_{αβ}− δ_{αβ}, this counterterm, however, produces only terms quadratic in h that are proportional to the Ricci tensor or the Ricci scalar. These can be removed by a covariant field redefinition, so that the intial 1/p^{2} type propagator does not receive corrections. A simple argument [10] shows that this property also holds for all higher order counterterms that can be expected to occur. Explicitly, consider a Lagrangian of the form
where L_{i}(g) are local currvature invariants of mass dimension −d_{i}, the g_{i} are dimensionless couplings, and the power of c_{d}G_{N} (normalized as in Equation (2.15)) gives each term in the sum mass dimension −d.
Let us briefly recap the power counting and scaling dimensions of local curvature invariants. These are integrals P_{i}[g] = ∫ d^{d}x L_{i}(g) over densities which are products of factors of the form \({\nabla _{{\alpha _1}}} \ldots {\nabla _{{\alpha _{l  4}}}}{R_{{\alpha _{l  3 \cdots}}{\alpha _l}}}\), suitably contracted to get a scalar and then multiplied by \(\sqrt g\). One easily checks \({L_i}\left({{\omega ^2}h} \right) = {\omega ^{{s_i}}}{L_i}\left(g \right),\omega > 0\), with s_{i} = d − 2p − q, where p is the total power of the Riemann tensor and q is the (necessarily even) total number of covariant derivatives. This scaling dimension matches minus the mass dimension of P_{i}(g) if g is taken dimensionless. For the mass dimension d_{i} of the associated coupling u_{i} in a product u_{i}P_{i}[g] one thus gets d_{i} = s_{i} = d − 2p − q. For example, the three local invariants in Equation (1.14) have mass dimensions −d_{0} = −d, −d_{1} = −(d − 2), −d_{2} = −(d − 4), respectively. There are three other local invariants with mass dimension −(d − 4), namely the ones with integrands C^{2} = R^{αβγδ}R_{αβγδ} − 2R^{αβ}R_{αβ} + R^{2}/3 (the square of the Weyl tensor), E = R^{αβγδ}R_{αβγδ} − 4R^{αβ}R_{αβ} + R^{2} (the generalized Euler density), and ∇^{2}R. Then there is a set of dimension − (d − 6) local invariants, and so on. Note that in d = 4 the integrands of the last two of the dimensionless invariants are total divergencies so that in d = 4 there are only 4 local invariants with nonpositive mass dimension (see Equation (2.26)).
A generic term in P_{i} will be symbolically of the form ∇^{q} R^{p}, where all possible contractions of the 4p + q indices may occur. Since the Ricci tensor is schematically of the form R = ∇^{2}f + O(f^{2}), the piece in P_{i} quadratic in f is of the form ∇^{q+4} R^{p−2}f^{2}. The coefficient of f^{2} is a tensor with 4 free indices and one can verify by inspection that the possible index contractions are such that the Ricci tensor or Ricci scalar either occurs directly, or after using the contracted Bianchi identity. In summary, one may restrict the sum in Equation (2.36) to terms with −d_{i} = −d + 2p + q, p ≥ 3, and the propagator derived from it will remain of the 1/p^{2} type to all loop orders. This suggests that Equation (2.36) will give rise to a renormalizable Lagrangian. A proof requires to show that after gauge fixing and ghost terms have been included all counter terms can be chosen local and covariant and has been given in [94].
Translated into Wilsonian terminology the above results then show the existence of a “weakly renormalizable” but “propagator unitary” Quantum Gravidynamics based on a perturbative Gaussian fixed point. The beta functions for this infinite set of couplings are presently unknown. If they were known, expectations are that at least a subset of the couplings would blow up at some finite momentum scale μ = μ_{term} and would be unphysical for μ > μ_{term}. In this case the computed results for physical quantities are likely to blow up likewise at some (high) energy scale μ = μ_{term}. In other words the couplings in Equation (2.36) are presumably not all asymptotically safe.
Let us add a brief comment on the relevantirrelevant distinction in this context, if only to point out that it is no longer useful. Recall from Section 1.3 that the notion of a relevant or irrelevant coupling applies even to flow lines not connected to a fixed point. This is the issue here. All but a few of the interaction monomials in Equation (2.36) are power counting irrelevant with respect to the 1/p^{2} propagator. Equivalently all but a few couplings \({u_i}(\mu) = {\mu ^{{d_i}}}{{\rm{g}}_i}(\mu)\) have nonnegative mass dimensions d_{i} ≥ 0. These are the only ones not irrelevant with respect to the stability matrix Θ computed at the perturbative Gaussian fixed point. However in Equation (2.36) these power counting irrelevant couplings with d_{i} < 0 are crucial for the absorption of infinities and thus are converted into practically relevant ones. In the context of Equation (2.36) we shall therefore discontinue to use the terms relevant/irrelevant.
Comparing both perturbative constructions one can see that the challenge of Quantum Gravidynamics lies not so much in achieving renormalizability, but to reconcile asymptotically safe couplings with the absence of unphysical propagating modes. This program is realized in Section 3 for the 2 + 2 reduction; the results of Section 4 for the R + R^{2} type truncation likewise are compatible with the absence of unphysical propagating modes.
In order to realize this program without reductions or truncations, a mathematically controllable nonperturbative definition of Quantum Gravidynamics is needed. Within a functional integral formulation this involves the following main steps: definition of a kinematical measure, setting up a coarse graining flow for the dynamical measures, and then probing its asymptotic safety.
2.3.3 Kinematical measure
For a functional integral over geometries even the kinematical measure, excluding the action dependent factor, is nontrivial to obtain. A geometric construction of such a measure has been given by Bern, Blau, and Mottola [31] generalizing a similar construction in YangMills theories [20]. It has the advantage of separating the physical and the gauge degrees of freedom (at least locally in field space) in a way that is not tied to perturbation theory. The functional integral aimed at is one over geometries, i.e. equivalence classes of metrics modulo diffeomorphisms. For the subsequent construction the difference between Lorentzian and Riemannian signature metrics is inessential; for definiteness we consider the Lorenzian case and correspondingly have an action dependence exp iS[g] in mind.
A geometry can be described by picking a representative ĝ_{αβ} described by a d(d − 1)/2 parametric metric. Here ĝ_{αβ} can be specified by picking an explicit parameterization or by imposing a gauge fixing condition (F ο ĝ)_{α} = 0. Typical choices are a harmonic gauge condition with respect to some reference metric connection, or a proper time gauge (F ο ĝ)_{α} = n_{α}, for a fixed timelike covector n_{α}. Once ĝ_{αβ} has been fixed, the push forward with a generic diffeomorphism V will generate the associated orbit,
The functional integral over the metrics g_{αβ} should factorize into one over the geometries ĝ and one over the diffeomorphisms,
with a V independent Jacobian J(ĝ) = J(ĝ). To compute the Jacobian one views the space of metrics locally as a pseudoRiemannian manifold \({\mathcal M},{\mathcal G}\) and uses the fact that the Jacobian J(g) at \(g \in {\mathcal M}\) only contains information about the cotangent space \({{\mathcal H}_T}\left(g \right)\) at g. Moreover picking coordinates on the cotangent space the Jacobian produced by a linear change of coordinates in the cotangent space will coincide with the Jacobian induced by a corresponding nonlinear change of coordinates on \({\mathcal M}\). In analogy with the finitedimensional case \(1 = \int {d{\mu _x}\left({\delta x} \right)\,\exp \left\{{{i \over 2}\delta {x^\alpha}{g_{\alpha \beta}}\left(x \right)\delta {x^\beta}} \right\}}\), \(d{\mu _x}\left({\delta x} \right) = \sqrt {\det h\left(x \right)}/{\left({2\pi} \right)^{d/2}}\), the measure \({\mathcal D}{g_{\alpha \beta}}\) can then be defined by imposing a normalization condition in terms of a Gaussian functional integral on the cotangent space
where the cotangent space \({{\mathcal H}_T}\left(g \right)\) to \({\mathcal M}\) at g is equipped with the metric
and the 1forms f_{αβ} ≔ δg_{αβ} span \({{\mathcal H}_T}\left(g \right)\) (with ‘T’ mnemonic for “tensor”). The measure defined by Equation (2.39) will be formally diffeomorphism invariant provided the metric on \({\mathcal M}\) is covariant. Requiring the metric to be ultralocal in addition fixes \({\mathcal G}\) to be of the above “deWitt” form up to an overall normalization and the undetermined constant C. The latter determines the signature of the metric on \({\mathcal M}\), it is of Riemannian type for C > −d/2, Lorentzian for C < −d/2, and degenerate for C = −d/2. Here we take C ≠ −d/2 but leave C unspecified otherwise.
On the tangent space the parameterization (2.37) amounts to
where V^{α}(x) = x^{α} + v^{α}(x) + O(v^{2}) and v^{α}d_{α} is the associated vector field. Further the Lie derivative \({{\mathcal L}_\upsilon}{g_{\alpha \beta}} = :{\left({L\upsilon} \right)_{\alpha \beta}}\) is for the given ĝ regarded a linear map L from vectors to symmetric tensors. Its kernel are the Killing vectors of g, while the kernel of its adjoint L^{†} describes the genuine variations in the geometry. Here
maps symmetric tensors to (co)vectors, the space of which is equipped with the obvious invariant inner product. With the normalization (Lv, Lv)_{T} = (v, L^{†}Lv)_{V} the vector Laplacian L^{†}L is given by
Under mild technical conditions L^{†}L will have a welldefined inverse, \({\left({{L^\dagger}L} \right)^{ 1}}:{\mathcal H}{\rm{v}}\left(g \right) \to {\mathcal H}{\rm{v}}\left(g \right)\). This allows one to replace Equation (2.41) by a decomposition orthogonal with respect to (,)_{T}, viz.
Using \({\mathcal D}f = J\left({\hat g} \right){\mathcal D}\upsilon {\mathcal D}\hat f\) and Equation (2.39) the computation of the Jacobian in Equation (2.38) then reduces to that of two Gaussians
which, suitably regularized, we take as the definition of J(ĝ). If ĝ is defined through a gauge fixing condition (F ο g)_{α} = 0 the result (2.45) can be rewritten as [31]
The subscript V denotes a vector determinant defined by \({\det _{\rm{V}}}\;W = \exp \{ \sum\nolimits_{k \ge 1} {{1 \over k}{\rm{T}}{{\rm{r}}_{\rm{V}}}{{(1  W)}^k}} \}\), where W maps vectors to vectors and the trace refers to the inner product in Equation (2.42). We remark that the second factor in Equation (2.46) is the FaddeevPopov determinant for the gauge \({(F \circ \hat f)_\alpha} = 0\), while the first factor is an \({{\hat f}_{\alpha \beta}}\) independent normalization factor. Within perturbation theory the above construction is equivalent to the familiar BRST formulation with ghosts.
In summary one arrives at the following proposal for a kinematical measure over geometries:
Here we omitted the normalization factor and for illustration included the factor exp(iS[g]) (with an invariant action, S[V_{*}ĝ] = S[ĝ]) that would specify the dynamical measure. The kinematical measure on the righthandside can also directly be verified to be diffeomorphism invariant and is hence welldefined on the equivalence classes. Of course the latter presupposes an invariant regulator which is why Equation (2.47) can only serve as a useful guideline. There are two ways to proceed from Equation (2.47). One would work with an noninvariant regulator, maintain the original notion of diffeomorphisms, and use conventional field theoretical techniques to restore the diffeomorphism invariance through Ward identites at the end. Alternatively one can replace the righthandside of Equation (2.47) directly with a discretized version, in which case of course diffeomorphism invariance cannot be tested on this level. Both strategies are complementary and have been widely used. For completeness let us also mention at this point the wellknown feature of functional integrals that once the regulator is removed the kinematical measure and the action factor do not have a mathematical meaning individually. In an interacting theory this is also related to the renormalization problem.
In the above discussion we did not split off the conformal factor in the geometries. Doing this however only requires minor modifications and was the setting used in [31, 142, 149]. In Equation (2.37) then ĝ_{αβ} is written as \({e^\sigma}g_{\alpha \beta}^ \bot\), where now \(g_{\alpha \beta}^ \bot\) is subject to a gauge condition (F ο g^{⊥})_{α} = 0. On the cotangent space this leads to a Yorktype decomposition [235] replacing (2.41), where the variations f_{σ} of the conformal factor and that of the tracefree part \(\hat f_{\alpha \beta}^ \bot\) of \({{\hat f}_{\alpha \beta}}\) describe the variations of the geometry, while the tracefree part, \({\left({{L^{{\rm{TF}}}}\upsilon} \right)_{\alpha \beta}}: = {\nabla _\alpha}{\upsilon _\beta} + {\nabla _\beta}{\upsilon _\alpha}  {2 \over d}{g_{\alpha \beta}}{\nabla ^\gamma}{\upsilon _\gamma}\), and the trace part of the Lie derivative (Lv)_{αβ} describe the gauge variations. Writing \({\mathcal D}{f_{\alpha \beta}} = {\mathcal D}{f_\sigma}{\mathcal D}f{\bot \over {\alpha \beta}}{\mathcal D}\upsilon\) the computation of the Jacobian proceeds as above and leads to Equation (2.47) with the following replacements: \({\mathcal D}{{\hat g}_{\alpha \beta}}\) is replaced with \({\mathcal D}g{\bot \over {\alpha \beta}}{\mathcal D}\sigma\), L with L^{TF}, and ĝ with e^{σ}g^{⊥} in the integrand. By studying the dependence of det_{V}(F ο L)(e^{σ}g^{⊥}) on the conformal factor it has been shown in [142] that in the Gaussian approximation of the Euclidean functional integral the instability associated with the unboundedness of the Euclidean EinsteinHilbert action is absent, due to a compensating contribution from the determinant. It can be argued that this mechanism is valid also for the interacting theory. From the present viewpoint however the (Euclidean or Lorentzian) EinsteinHilbert action should not be expected to be the proper microscopic action. So the “large field” or “large gradient” problem has to be readdressed anyhow in the context of Quantum Gravidynamics. Note also that once the conformal mode of the metric has been split off the way how it enters a microscopic or an effective action is no longer constrained by power counting considerations. See [12] for an effective dynamics for the conformal factor only.
Once a kinematical measure on the equivalence classes of metrics (or other dynamical variables) has been defined, the construction of an associated dynamical measure will have to rest on renormalization group ideas. Apart from the technical problems invoved in setting up a computationally useful coarse graining flow for the measure on geometries, there is also the apparent conceptual problem how diffeomorphism invariance can be reconciled with the existence of a scale with respect to which the coarse graining is done. However no problem of principle arises here. First, similar as in a lattice field theory, where one has to distinguish between the external lattice spacing and a dynamically generated correlation length, a distinction between an external scale parameter and a dynamically codetermined resolution scale has to be made. A convenient way to achieve compatibility of the coarse graining with diffeomorphism invariance is by use of the background field formalism. The initially generic background metric serves as a reference to discriminate modes, say in terms of the spectrum of a covariant differential operator in the background metric (see Section 4.1). Subsequently the background is selfconsistenly identified with the expectation value of the quantum metric as in the discussion below.
The functional integral over “all geometries” should really be thought of as one over “all geometries subject to suitable boundary conditions”. Likewise the action is meant to include boundary terms which indirectly specify the state of the quantum system.
After a coarse graining flow for the dynamical measures has been set up the crucial issue will be whether or not it has a fixed point with a nontrivial finitedimensional unstable manifold, describing an interacting system. In this case it would define an asymptotically safe functional measure in the sense defined in Section 1.3. For the reasons explained there the existence of an asymptotically safe functional integral masure is however neither necessary nor sufficient for a physically viable theory of Quantum Gravidynamics. For the latter a somewhat modified notion of a safe functional measure is appropriate which incorporates the interplay between couplings and observables:

1.
The choice of couplings has to be based on observables; this will pin down the physically relevant notion of positivity/unitarity.

2.
The number of essential or relevant couplings is not apriori finite.

3.
What matters is not so much the dimension of the unstable manifold than how observables depend on the relevant couplings.
2.3.4 Effective action and states
Unfortunately, at present little is known about generic quantum gravity observables, so that the functional averages whose expansion would define physical couplings are hard to come by. For the time being we therefore adopt a more pragmatic approach and use as the central object to formulate the renormalization flow the background effective action Γ[g_{αβ}, ḡ_{αβ},…] as described in Appendix B. Here g_{αβ} is interpreted as an initially sourcedependent “expectation value of the quantum metric”, ḡ_{αβ} is an initially independently prescribed “background metric”, and the dots indicate other fields, conjugate to sources, which are inessential for the following discussion. For clarities sake let us add that it is not assumed that the metric exists as an operator, or that the metriclike “conjugate sources” g_{αβ}, ḡ_{αβ} are necessarily the best choice.
The use of an initially generic background geometry ḡ_{αβ} has the advantage that one can define propagation and covariant modecutoffs with respect to it. A background effective action of this type has an interesting interplay with the notion of a state [156, 157]. An effective action implicitly specifies an expectation functional \({\mathcal O} \to {\left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle _{\bar g}}\) (“a state”) which depends parameterically on the background metric. The background metric is then selfconsistently identified with the expectation value of the metric
in a way that encodes information about the full quantum dynamics. Importantly this selfconsistent background ḡ_{*}[g]_{αβ} is no longer prescribed externally, and to the extent one has access to nontrivial solutions ḡ_{αβ} = ḡ_{*}[g]_{αβ}, Equation (2.49) gives rise to a formulation with a ‘statedependent dynamically adjusted reference metric’. The functional g ↦ ḡ_{*}[g] is defined by
We postpone the question how solutions of Equation (2.49) can be found. Note that after the identification has been made \(\bar \Gamma \left[ {g, \ldots} \right]: = \Gamma \left[ {g,{{\bar g}_{\ast}}\left[ g \right], \ldots} \right]\) is a functional of a single metric only, which obeys
Vertex functions are defined by functional differentiation at fixed background with subsequent identification (2.48), i.e.
The set of these vertex functions in principle contains the same information as the original functional measure including the state. One would expect them to be related to Smatrix elements on a selfconsistent background (2.48), but their precise physics significance remains to be understood.
The condition (2.49) is equivalent to the vanishing of the extremizing sources \(J_{\ast}^{\alpha \beta}\left[ {g,\bar g, \ldots} \right]\) in the definition of Legendre transform (see Appendix B). Evidently Equation (2.49) also amounts to the vanishing of the onepoint functions in Equation (2.51). Usually the extremizing sources \(J_{\ast}^{\alpha \beta}\left[ {g,\bar g, \ldots} \right]\) are constructed by formal inversion of a power series in \({{\bar f}_{\alpha \beta}}: = {g_{\alpha \beta}}  {{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}\). Then \({{\bar f}_{\alpha \beta}}=0\) always is a solution of Equation (2.49) and the functional g ↦ ḡ_{*} [g] is simply the identity. In this case the selfconsistent background coincides with the naive prescribed background. To find nontrivial solutions of Equation (2.49) one has to go beyond the formal series inversions and the uniqueness assumptions usually made.
Due to the highly nonlocal character of the effective action the identification of physical solutions of Equation (2.49) is a nontrivial problem. The interpretation via Equation (2.48) suggests an indirect characterization, namely those solutions of Equation (2.49) should be regarded as physical which come from physically acceptable states [157].
The notion of a state is implicitly encoded in the effective action. Recall that the standard effective action, when evaluated at a given timeindependent function ϕ^{i} = 〈χ^{i}〉, is proportional to the minimum value of the Hamiltonian H in that part of the Hilbert space spanned by normalizable states ∣ψ〉 satisfying 〈ψ∣χ^{i}∣ψ〉 = ϕ^{i}. A similar interpretation holds formally for the various background effective actions [51]. In conventional quantum field theories there is a clearcut notion of a ground state and of the state space based on it. In a functional integral formulation the information about the state can be encoded in suitable boundary terms for the microscopic action. Already in quantum field theories on curved but nondynamical spacetimes a preferred vacuum is typically absent and physically acceptable states have to be selected by suitable conditions (like, for example, the wellknown Hadamard condition in the case of a KleinGordon field). In quantum gravity the formulation of analogous selection criteria is an open problem. As a tentative example we mention the condition formulated after Equation (2.53) below. On the level of the effective action one should think of Γ as a functional of both the selected state and of the fields. The selected state will indirectly (co)determine the space of functionals on which the renormalization flow acts. For example the type of nonlocalities which actually occur in Γ should know about the fact that Γ stems from a microscopic action suited for the appropriate notion of positivity and from a physically acceptable state.
2.3.5 Towards physical quantities
Finally one will have to face the question of what generic physical quantities are and how to compute them. Although this is of course a decisive issue in any approach to quantum gravity, surprisingly little work has been done in this direction. In classical general relativity Dirac observables do in principle encode all intrinsic properties of the spacetimes, but they are nonlocal functionals of the metric and implicitly refer to a solution of the Cauchy problem. In a canonical formulation quantum counterparts thereof should generate the physical state space, but they are difficult to come by, and a canonical formulation is anyhow disfavored by the asymptotic safety scenario. Smatrix elements with respect to a selfconsistent background (2.48) or similar objects computed from the vertex functions (2.51) might be candidates for generic physical quantities, but have not been studied so far.
For the time being a pragmatic approach is to consider quantities which are of interest in a quantum field theory on a fixed but generic geometry and then perform an average over geometries with the measure previously constructed. On a perturbative level interesting possible effects have been studied in [202, 215]. On a nonperturbative level this type of correlations have been discussed mostly in discretized formulations but the principle is of course general. To fix ideas we note the example of a geodesic two point correlator of a scalar field ϕ [58],
where Σ_{g} (x, y) is the minimal geodesic distance between the the points x and y. The first integral is the heuristic geometry and matter functional integral; all configurations are taken into account which produce the given geodesic distance R. A nontrivial prediction of the present scenario is that if Equation 2.52) is based on an asymptotically safe functional measure, a log(R) behavior for R → 0 is expected [157].
If one wants to probe the functional measure over geometries only, an interesting operator insertion is the trace of the heat kernel [115, 118, 8],
Here \(\Delta g: = {g^{\alpha \beta}}{\nabla _\alpha}{\nabla _\beta} = {\sqrt g ^{ 1}}{\partial _\alpha}\left({{{\sqrt {gg}}^{\alpha \beta}}{\partial _\beta}} \right)\) is the LaplaceBeltrami operator, and the heat kernel exp(TΔ_{g})(x, x′) associated with it is the symmetric (in x, x′) bisolution of the heat equation ∂_{T}K = ∆_{g}K with initial condition lim_{T→0} exp(TΔ_{g})(x, x′) = δ(x, x′). The T → ∞ limit will then probe the large scale structure of the typical geometries in the measure and the T → 0 limit will probe the micro aspects. Both expressions (2.52, 2.53) are here only heuristic, in particular normalization factors have been omitted and the functional measure over geometries would have to be defined as previously outlined. The condition that the T → ∞ behavior of G(T) = 〈P_{g} (T)〉 is like that in flat space, 〈P_{g}(T)〉 ∼ T^{−d/2} for T → ∞, is an example for a (rather weak) selection criterion for states [157]. The states obeying it should favor geometries that are smooth and almost flat on large scales.
In a lattice field theory the discretized functional measure typically generates an intrinsic scale, the (dimensionless) correlation length ξ, which allows one to convert lattice distances into a physical standard of length, such that say, ξ lattice spacings equal 1 fm. A (massive) continuum limit is eventually defined by sending ξ to infinity in a way such that physical distances (number of lattice spacings)/ξ fm are kept fixed and a ‘nonboring’ limit arises. In a functional measure over geometries dμ_{k,Λ}(g), initially defined with an UV cutoff Λ and an external scale parameter k, it is not immediate how to generalize the concept of a correlation length. Exponents extracted from the decay properties of Equation (2.52) or Equation (2.53) are natural candidates, but the ultimate test of the fruitfulness of such a definition would lie in the successful construction of a continuum limit. In contrast to a conventional field theory it is not even clear what the desired/required properties of such a continuum system should be. The working definitions proposed in Section 1.3 tries to identify some salient features.
2.4 Dimensional reduction of residual interactions in UV
As highlighted in the introduction an important qualitative feature of an asymptotically safe functional integral can be inferred without actually evaluating it, namely that in the extreme ultraviolet the residual interactions appear twodimensional. There are a number of interconnected heuristic arguments for this phenomenon which we present here.
2.4.1 Scaling of fixed point action
Consider a candidate for a quasilocal microscopic action
where the u_{i}(k) are running couplings of mass dimension d_{i} and P_{i}[g] are local invariants of mass dimension −d_{i}. By quasilocal we mean here that the sum may be infinite and off hand arbitrary high derivative terms may occur. For example such an action arises in the perturbative framework advocated by Gomis and Weinberg [94]. When viewed as a renormalized action perturbatively defined in the above sense (with the UV cutoff strictly removed) the running of the \(u_i^{{\rm{PT}}}(k)\) is unknown but expectations are that \({\rm{g}}_i^{{\rm{PT}}}(k) = {k^{ {d_i}}}u_i^{{\rm{PT}}}(k)\) are not uniformly bounded functions in k; then the dimensionless couplings are not asymptotically safe but blow up at various (idependent) intermediate scales. The situation is drastically different if all the couplings are assumed to be asymptotically safe. Then \({u_i}(k) = {{\rm{g}}_i}(k){k^{{d_i}}}\sim{\rm{g}}_1^ {\ast} {k^{{d_i}}}\) as k → ∞ and if one uses the fact that s_{i} = d_{i} (see the discussion after Equation (2.36)) for all local invariants one gets
for k → ∞, with \({S_{\ast}}[g] = \sum\nolimits_i {{\rm{g}}_i^{\ast}} {S_i}[g]\) the candidate fixed point action. The overall scale of the metric is an inessential parameter (see Equations (1.1, A.8)), and as discussed in Section 2.1 a fixed point action always refers to an equivalence class modulo possibly running inessential parameters.
One sees that in the fixed point regime \({{\rm{g}}_i}(k)\sim{\rm{g}}_i^ {\ast}\) the kdependence enters only through the combination k^{2}g_{αβ}, a kind of selfsimilarity. This simple but momentous fact eventually underlies all the subsequent arguments. It is ‘as if’ in the fixed point regime only a rescaled metric \({{\tilde g}_{\alpha \beta}} = {k^2}{g_{\alpha \beta}}\) entered which carries dimension two. This has consequences for the ‘effective dimensionality’ of Newton’s constant: Recall that conventionally the Ricci scalar term, \(\int {dx} \,\sqrt g R(g)\), has mass dimension 2 − d in d dimensions. Upon substitution \({g_{\alpha \beta}} \mapsto {{\tilde g}_{\alpha \beta}}\) one quickly verifies that \(\int {dx} \,\sqrt {\tilde g} R(\tilde g)\) is dimensionless. Its prefactor, i.e. the inverse of Newton’s constant, then can be taken dimensionless — as it is in two dimensions. Compared to the infrared regime it looks ‘as if’ Newton’s constant changed its effective dimensionality from d − 2 to zero, i.e. at the fixed point there must be a large anomalous dimension η_{N} = 2 − d.
Formally what is special about the EinsteinHilbert term is that the kinetic (second derivative) term itself carries a dimensionful coupling. To avoid the above conclusion one might try to assign the metric a mass dimension 2 from the beginning (i.e. not just in the asymptotic regime). However this would merely shift the effect from the gravity to the matter sector, as we wish to argue now.
In addition to the dimensionful metric \({{\tilde g}_{\alpha \beta}}: = {k^2}{g_{\alpha \beta}}\), we introduce a dimensionful vielbein by \({{\tilde E}_\alpha}^m: = kE_\alpha ^m\), if \({g_{\alpha \beta}} = {E_\alpha}^m{E_\beta}^n{\eta _{mn}}\) is the dimensionless metric. With respect to a dimensionless metric \(\int {dx\sqrt g R(g)}\) has mass dimension 2 − d in d dimensions, while the mass dimensions d_{χ} of a Bose field χ and that d_{ψ} of a Fermi field ψ are set such that their kinetic terms are dimensionless, i.e. d_{χ} = (d − 2)/2 and d_{ψ} = (d − 1)/2. Upon substitution \({g_{\alpha \beta}} \mapsto {{\tilde g}_{\alpha \beta}}\) the gravity part \(\int {dx\sqrt {\tilde g} R(\tilde g)}\) becomes dimensionless, while the kinetic terms of a Bose and Fermi field pick up a mass dimension of d − 2 and d − 1, respectively. This means their wave function renormalization constants Z_{χ}(k) and Z_{ψ}(k) are now dimensionful and should be written in terms of dimensionless parameters as Z_{χ}(k) = k^{d−2}/g_{χ}(k) and Z_{ψ}(k) = k^{d−1}/g_{ψ}(k), say. For the dimensionless parameters one expects finite limit values \({\lim\nolimits _{k \rightarrow \infty}}{{\rm{g}}_\chi}(k) = {\rm{g}}_\chi ^ {\ast} > 0\) and \(\mathop {\lim}\nolimits_{k \to \infty} {{\rm{g}}_\psi}(k) = {\rm{g}}_\psi ^0 > 0\), since otherwise the corresponding (free) field would simply decouple. Defining the anomalous dimension as usual. η_{χ} = −k∂_{k} ln Z_{χ} and η_{ψ} = −k∂_{k} ln Z_{ψ}, the argument presented after Equation (1.5) can be repeated and gives that \(\eta _{\rm{\chi}}^{\ast} = 2  d\), \(\eta _\psi ^{\ast} = 1  d\) for the fixed point values, respectively. The original large momentum behavior 1/p^{2} for bosons and 1/p for fermions is thus modified to a 1/p^{d} behavior in the fixed point regime, in both cases.
This translates into a logarithmic short distance behavior which is universal for all (free) matter. Initially the propagators used here should be viewed as “test propagators”, in the sense that one transplants the information in the η’s derived from the gravitational functional integral into a conventional propagator on a (flat or curved) background spacetime. Since the short distance asymptotics is the same on any (flat or curved) reference spacetime, this leads to the prediction anticipated in Section 2.3: The short distance behavior of the quantum gravity average of the geodesic twopoint correlator (2.52) of a scalar field should be logarithmic.
On the other hand the universality of the logarithmic short distance behavior in the matter propagators also justifies to attribute the phenomenon to a modification in the underlying random geometry, a kind of “quantum equivalence principle”.
2.4.2 Anomalous dimension at nonGaussian fixed point
The “anomalous dimension argument” has already been sketched in the introduction. Here we present a few more details and relate it to Section 2.4.1.
Suppose again that the unkown microscopic action of Quantum Gravidynamics is quasilocal and reparameterization invariant. The only term containing second derivatives then is the familiar EinsteinHilbert term \({Z_{\rm{N}}}\int {dx\,\sqrt g R(g)}\) of mass dimension 2 − d in d dimensions, if the metric is taken dimensionless. As explained in Section 2.3.2 the dimensionful running prefactor multiplying it Z_{N}(k) (N for “Newton”) can be treated either as a wave function renormalization or as a quasiessential dimensionless coupling g_{N}, where
Here we treat g_{N} as running, in which case its running may also be affected by all the other couplings (gravitational and nongravitational, made dimensionless by taking out a suitable power of k). The short distance behavior of the propagator will now be governed by the “anomalous dimension” η_{N} = −k∂_{k} ln Z_{N}(k) by general field theoretical arguments. On the other hand the flow equation for g_{N} can be expressed in terms of η_{N} as k∂_{k}g_{N} = [d − 2 + η(g_{N}, other)] g_{N}, where we schematically indicated the dependence on the other dimensionless couplings. If this flow equation now has a nontrivial fixed point \(\infty > {\rm{g}}_{\rm{N}}^ {\ast} > 0\), the only other way how the righthandside can vanish is for
irrespective of the detailed behavior of the other couplings as long as no blowup occurs. This is a huge anomalous dimension. We can now transplant this anomalous dimension into a “test graviton propagator” on a flat background. The characteristic property of η_{N} then is that it gives rise to a a high momentum behavior of the form \({({p^2})^{ 1 + \eta {\rm{N/2}}}}\) modulo logarithms, or a short distance behavior of the form \({(\sqrt {{x^2}})^{2  d  \eta/{\rm{N}}}}\) modulo logarithms. This follows from general field theoretical principles: a CallanSymanzik equation for the effective action, the vanishing of the beta function at the fixed point, and the decoupling of the low momentum modes. Keeping only the leading part the vanishing power at η_{N} = 2 − d translates into a logarithmic behavior, ln x^{2}, formally the same as for a massless KleinGordon field in a twodimensional field theory.
The fact that a large anomalous dimension occurs at a nonGaussian fixed point was initially observed in the context of the 2 + ϵ expansion [116, 117] and later in computations based on the effective average action [133, 131]. The above argument shows that no specific computational information enters.
Let us emphasize that in general an anomalous dimension is not related to the geometry of field propagation and in a conventional field theory one cannot sensibly define a fractal dimension by looking at the high momentum behavior of a twopoint function [125]. What is special about gravity is ultimately that the propagating field itself defines distances. One aspect thereof is the universal way matter is affected, as seen in Section 2.4.1. In contrast to an anomalous dimension in conventional field theories, this “quantum equivalence principle” allows one to attribute a geometric significance to the modified short distance behavior of the test propagators, see Section 2.4.4.
2.4.3 Strict renormalizability and 1/p^{4} propagators
With hindsight the above patterns are already implicit in earlier work on strictly renormalizable gravity theories. As emphasized repeatedly the benign renormalizability properties of higher derivative theories are mostly due to the use of 1/p^{4} type propagator (in d = 4 dimensions). As seen in Section 2.3.2 this 1/p^{4} type behavior goes hand in hand with asymptotically safe couplings. Specifically for the dimensionless Newton’s constant g_{N} it is compatible with the existence of a nontrivial fixed point (see Equation (2.31)). This in turn enforces anomalous dimension η_{N} = −2 at the fixed point which links back to the 1/p^{4} type propagator.
Similarly in the 1/N expansion [216, 217, 203] a nontrivial fixed point goes hand in hand with a propagator whose high momentum behavior is of the form 1/(p^{4} ln p^{2}) in four dimensions, and formally 1/p^{d} in d dimensions. In position space this amounts to a ln x^{2} behavior, once again.
2.4.4 Spectral dimension and scaling of fixed point action
The scaling (2.55) of the fixed point action also allows one to estimate the behavior of the spectral dimension in the ultraviolet. This leads to a variant [157] of the argument first used in [135, 134]).
Consider the quantum gravity average 〈P_{g}(T)〉 over the trace of the heat kernel P_{g}(T) in a class of states to be specified later. Morally speaking the functional average is over compact closed ddimensional manifolds \(({\mathcal M},g)\), and the states are such that they favor geometries which are smooth and approximately flat on large scales.
Let us briefly recapitulate the definition of the heat kernel and some basic properties. For a smooth Riemannian metric g on a compact closed dmanifold let \({\Delta _g}: = {g^{\alpha \beta}}{\nabla _\alpha}{\nabla _\beta} = {\sqrt g ^{ 1}}{\partial _\alpha}(\sqrt g {g^{\alpha \beta}}{\partial _\beta})\) be the LaplaceBeltrami operator. The heat kernel exp(TΔ_{g})(x, x′) associated with it is the symmetric (in x, x′) bisolution of the heat equation ∂_{T}K = Δ_{g}K with initial condition lim_{T→0}exp(TΔ_{g})(x, x′) = δ(x, x′). Since \(({\mathcal M},g)\) is compact, Δ_{g} has purely discrete spectrum with finite multiplicities. We write \( {\Delta _g}{\phi _n}(g) = {\varepsilon _n}(g){\phi _n}(g)\), n ≥ 0, for the spectral problem and assume that the eigenfunctions ϕ_{n} are normalized and the eigenvalues monotonically ordered, \({\varepsilon _n}(g) \leq {\varepsilon _{n + 1}}(g)\). We write \(V(g) = \int {dx\sqrt g}\) for the volume of (\(({\mathcal M},g)\), g) and
for the trace of the heat kernel. In the random walk picture P_{g}(T) can be interpreted as the probability of a test particle diffusing away from a point \(x \in {\mathcal M}\) and to return to it after the fictitious diffusion time T has elapsed. In flat Euclidean space \((\mathcal M,g) = ({{\rm{\mathbb R}}^d},\eta)\) for example P_{η}(T) = (4πT)^{−d/2} for all T. For a generic manifold the trace of the heat kernel cannot be evaluated exactly. However the short time and the long time asymptotics can to some extent be described in closed form. Clearly the T → ∞ limit probes the large scale structure of a Riemannian manifold (small eigenvalues \({{\mathcal E}_n}(g)\)) while the T → 0 limit probes the small scales (large eigenvalues \({\mathcal E_n}(g)\)).
For T → 0 one has an asymptotic expansion \({P_g}(T) \sim {(4\pi T)^{ d/2}}\sum\nolimits_{n \geq 0} {{T^n}} \int {dx} \sqrt g {a_n}(x)\), where the a_{n} are the SeeleydeWitt coefficients. These are local curvature invariants, \({a_0} = 1,\;{a_1} = {1 \over 6}R(g)\), etc. The series can be rearranged so as to collect terms with a fixed power in the curvature or with a fixed number of derivatives [225, 17]. Both produces nonlocal curvature invariants. The second rearrangement is relevant when the curvatures are small but rapidly varying (so that the derivatives of the curvatures are more important then their powers). The leading derivative terms then are given by \({P_g}(T) \sim {(4\pi T)^{ d/2}}[V(g) + T\int {dx\sqrt {g{a_1}}} + {T^2}{N_2}(T) + \ldots ]\), where N_{2}(T) is a known nonlocal quadratic expression in the curvature tensors (see e.g. [225, 17] for surveys). The T → ∞ behavior is more subtle as also global information on the manifold enters. For compact manifolds a typical behavior is P_{g}(T) ∼ (4πT)^{−d/2}[1 + O(exp(−cT))], where the rate of decay c of the subleading term is governed by the smallest nonzero eigenvalue.
Returning now to the quantum gravity average 〈P_{g}(T)〉, one sees that on any state on which all local curvature polynomials vanish the leading short distance behavior of 〈P_{g}(T)〉 will always be ∼ T^{−d/2}, as on a fixed manifold. The same will hold if the nonlocal invariants occurring in the derivative expansion all have vanishing averages in the state considered. A leading short distance behavior of the form
with d_{s} ≠ d will thus indicate that either the operations “taking the average” and “performing the asymptotic expansion for T → 0” no longer commute, or that the microscopic geometry is very rough so that the termwise averages no longer vanish, or both. Whenever welldefined the quantity d_{s}(T) ≔ −2d ln〈P_{g}(T)〉/d ln T is known as the spectral dimension (of the microaspects of the random geometries probed by the state \({\mathcal O} \mapsto \left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle\). See [115, 118, 8] for earlier uses in random geometry, and [27] for an evaluation of the spectral dimension for diffusion on the Sierpinski gasket based on a principle similar to Equation (2.62) below.
We assume now that the states considered are such that the T → ∞ behavior of 〈P_{g}(T)〉 is like that in flat space, i.e. 〈P_{g}(T)〈 ∼ T^{−d/2} for T → ∞. This is an indirect characterization of a class of states which favor geometries that are smooth and almost flat on large scales [157]. (A rough analogy may be the way how the shortdistance Hadamard condition used for free QFTs in curved spacetime selects states with desirable stability properties.) Recall that in a functional integral formulation the information about the state can be encoded in suitable boundary terms added to the microscopic action. The effective action used in a later stage of the argument is supposed to be one which derives from a microscopic action in which suitable (though not explicitly known) boundary terms encoding the information about the state have been included.
Since \({(4\pi T)^{ d/2}} = \int {{{{d^d}p} \over {{{(2\pi)}^d}}}\exp ( {p^2}T)}\) one can give the stipulated T → ∞ asymptotics an interpretation in terms of the spectrum {p^{2}, p ∈ ℝ^{d}} of the Laplacian of a ‘typical’ reference metric q_{αβ} which is smooth and almost flat at large scales. The spectrum of Δ_{q} must be such that the small spectral values can be well approximated by {p^{2} < C, p ∈ ℝ^{d}} for some constant C > 0. Its unknown large eigenvalues will then determine the short distance behavior of 〈P_{g}(T)〉. We can incorporate this modification of the spectrum by introducing a function F_{q}(p^{2}) which tends to 1 for p^{2} → 0, and whose large p^{2} behavior remains to be determined. Thus
The following argument now suggests that within the asymptotic safety scenario F_{q}(p^{2}) ∼ p^{2} for p^{2} → ∞. Before turning to the argument let us note that this property of F_{q}(p^{2}) entails
The “microscopic” spectral dimension equals half the “macroscopic” d. Notably this equals 2, as suggested by the “anomalous dimension argument” precisely in d = 4 dimensions.
The argument for F_{q}(p^{2}) ∼ p^{2} for p^{2} → ∞ goes as follows: We return to discrete description \({P_g}(T) = \sum\nolimits_n {{e^{ {{\mathcal E}_n}(g)T}}}\) for \(({\mathcal M},g)\) compact, and consider the average of one term in the sum \(\left\langle {{e^{ {{\mathcal E}_n}(g)T}}} \right\rangle\), with \({{{\mathcal E}_n}(g)}\) being large. The computation of this average is a single scale problem in the terminology of Appendix A. As such it should allow for a good description via an effective field theory at scale k. One way of doing this is in terms of the effective average action \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}[g]\) as described in Section 4.1. Here only the fact is needed that the average \(\left\langle {{e^{ {{\mathcal E}_n}(g)T}}} \right\rangle\) can approximately be evaluated as [135, 134]
As indicated (ğ_{k})_{αβ} is a stationary point of the effective action \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}[g]\) at a certain scale k. Since the only scale available is \({{{\mathcal E}_n}}\) itself, the relevant scale k is for given n determined by the implicit equation \({k^2}={{\mathcal E}_n}({\check g_k})\). Next we consider how these spectral values scale in the fixed point regime where the dimensionless couplings are approximately constant, g_{i}(k) ≈ g_{i}. Recall from Equation (2.55) the limiting behavior \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}[g] \rightarrow {S_{\ast}}[{k^2}g]\) as k → ∞. Two stationary points (ğ_{k})_{αβ} for \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}\) and \({({\check g_{{k_0}}})_{\alpha \beta}}\) for \({{\bar \Gamma}_{k_0}}\) will thus in the fixed point regime be simply related by \({k^2}{\check g_k} = k_0^2{\check g_{{k_0}}}\). Since \({k^2}{\Delta _{{k^2}g}} = {\Delta _g}\) this means for the spectral values \({k^2}{{\mathcal E}_n}({\check g_k}) = k_0^2{{\mathcal E}_n}({\check g_{{k_0}}})\). In order to make contact to the continuum parameterization in Equation (2.60) we now identify for given p the n’s such that for the typical metric q_{αβ} entering Equation (2.60) one has \({{\mathcal E}_n}(q) \sim {p^2}\) for large n. After this reparameterization \({{\mathcal E}_n} = {{\mathcal E}_{p}}, \; p = \sqrt {{p^2}}\) one can identify the F_{q}(p^{2}) in Equation (2.60) with \({F_q}({p^2}) = {{\mathcal E}_p}(\check {g}_{k=p}) = {{\mathcal E}_p}({\check g_{{k_0}}})\). This scales for p → ∞ like p^{2}, which completes the argument.
In summary, the asymptotic safety scenario leads to the specific (theoretical) prediction that the (normally powerlike) short distance singularities of all free matter propagators are softened to logarithmic ones — normally a characteristic feature of massless KleinGordon fields in two dimensions. In quantum gravity averages like Equation (2.52) this leads to the expectation that they should scale like G(R) ∼ ln R, for R → 0. On the other hand this universality allows one to shuffle the effect from matter to gravity propagators. This justifies to attribute the effect to a modification in the underlying random geometry. The average of heat of the heat kernel, G(T) in Equation (2.53), then scales like T^{−d/4}. This means the spectral dimension of the random geometries probed by a certain class of “macroscopic” states equals d/2, which (notably!) equals 2 precisely in d = 4 dimensions.
Accepting this dimensional reduction in the extreme ultraviolet as a working hypothesis one is led to the following question: Is there a twodimensional field theory which provides an effective description of this regime? “Effective” can mean here “approximate” but quantitatively close, or a system which lies in the same universality class as the original one in the relevant regime. “Effective” is of course not meant to indicate that the theory does not make sense beyond a certain energy scale, as in another use of the term “effective field theory”. We don’t have an answer to the above question but some characteristics of the putative field theory can easily be identified:

1.
It should be twodimensional and selfinteracting, the latter because of the nonGaussian nature of the original fixed point.

2.
It should not be a conformal field theory in the usual sense, as the extreme UV regime in the original theory is reached from outside the critical surface (“massive continuum limit”).

3.
It should have degrees of freedom which can account for the antiscreening behavior presumed to be responsible for the asymptotically safe stabilization of the UV properties.
Note that in principle the identification of such a UV field theory is a wellposed problem. Presupposing that the functional integral has been made welldefined and through suitable operator insertions data for its extreme UV properties have been obtained, for any proposed field theory with the Properties 1–3 one can test whether or not these data are reproduced.
3 Asymptotic Safety from Dimensional Reduction
The systems investigated in this section can be looked at in two ways. First as prototype field theories which have the qualitative Properties 1–3 tentatively identified at the end of the last Section 2.4.4 as characteristics which an effective field theory description of the extreme UV regime of Quantum Gravidynamics should have. Second, they can be viewed as a symmetry reduction of the gravitational functional integral whose embedding into the full theory is left open for the time being. Technically one starts off from the usual gravitational functional integral but restricts it from “4geometries modulo diffeomorphisms” to “4geometries constant along a 2 + 2 foliation modulo diffeomorphisms”. This means instead of the familiar 3+1 foliation of geometries one considers a foliation in terms of twodimensional hypersurfaces Σ and performs the functional integral only over configurations that are constant as one moves along the stack of twosurfaces. The same can be done with the functional integral over matter configurations.
The truncation can be motivated in various ways. It is complementary to the Eikonal sector and describes gravity with collinear initial data in a sense explained later on. It takes into account the crucial ‘spin 2’ aspect, that is, linear and nonlinear gravitational waves are included in this sector and treated without further approximations. Asymptotic safety in this sector is arguably a necessary condition for asymptotic safety of the full theory. Finally, as already mentioned, the sector can serve as a test bed for the investigation of the renormalization structures needed once the extreme UV regime of has been reached.
3.1 2 + 2 truncation of Einstein gravity + matter
In accordance with the general picture the renormalization flow will also dictate here to a certain extent the form of the renormalized actions. As mentioned the truncated 2 + 2 functional integral turns out to inherit the lack of perturbative renormalizability (with finitely many couplings) from the gravitational part of the full functional integral. However the restricted functional integral is more benign insofar as it is possible to preserve the conformai geometry in field space and insofar as no higher derivative terms are required for the absorption of cutoff dependencies. The strategy is similar as in the perturbative treatment of the full theory advocated by Gomis and Weinberg [94]: One works with a propagator free of unphysical poles and takes into account all counter terms enforced, but only those. (For the reasons explained in Section 2.3.2 we deliberatly avoid using the ‘relevant/irrelevant’ terminology here.) To emphasize the fact that no higher derivative terms are needed we shall refer to the quantum theory defined that way as the symmetry truncation of Quantum Einstein Gravity. We anticipate this fact in the following by taking a classical gravity + matter action as a starting point which is quadratic in the derivatives only (see Equation (3.1) below).
3.1.1 Gravity theories
Since in the renormalization of the restricted functional integral no higher derivative terms will be generated, it suffices to consider 4D gravity actions with second derivatives only. Specifically we consider 4D Einstein gravity coupled to k Abelian gauge fields and \({\bar n}\) scalars in a way they typically arise from higherdimensional (super)gravity theories. We largely follow the treatment in [45, 46]. The higherdimensional origin of their 3D reductions is explored in [56]. The 4D action is of the form
Here g_{αβ}, 1 ≤ α, β ≤ 4, is the spacetime metric with eigenvalues (−, +, +, +), R(g) is its scalar curvature, and indices are raised with g^{αβ}. There are k real Abelian vector fields arranged in a column \({\bar n}\), with field strength F_{αβ} = ∂_{α}B_{β} − ∂_{β}B_{α} and dual field strength \(^{\ast}{F^{\alpha \beta}} = {1 \over {2\sqrt { g}}}{\epsilon ^{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}}{F_{\gamma \delta}}\). The scalars \({{\bar \varphi}^i},\,i = 1, \ldots, \bar n\), parameterize a noncompact Riemannian symmetric space \(\bar G/\bar H\) with metric \({{{\rm{\bar m}}}_{ij}}(\bar \varphi)\). Its dim Ḡ Killing vectors give rise to a Lie algebra valued Noether current \({{\bar J}_\alpha}\). In terms of them the sigmamodel Lagrangian for the scalars can be written as \({\left\langle {{{\bar J}^\alpha},{{\bar J}_\alpha}} \right\rangle _{{\rm{\bar g}}}}\), where \({\left\langle {.,.} \right\rangle _{{\rm{\bar g}}}}\) is an invariant scalar product on the Lie algebra ḡ. Finally the coupling matrices \(\mu = \mu (\bar \varphi)\) and \(\nu = \nu (\bar \varphi)\) are symmetric k × k matrices that depend on the scalars; the constant q > 0 has been extracted for normalization purposes. The vector fields are supposed to contribute positively to the energy density which requires that μ is a positive definite matrix. As such it has a unique positive square root μ^{1/2} to be used later. The coupling matrices μ and ν are now chosen in a way that renders the field equations derived from S_{4} — though in general not the action itself — Ḡinvariant.
In brief this is done as follows. The field equation for the gauge fields ∇_{α}(μF^{αβ} − ν*F^{αβ}) = 0 can be interpreted as the Bianchi identity for a field strength G_{αβ} = ∂_{α}Cβ − ∂_{β}C_{α} derived from dual potentials C_{α}. For later convenience one chooses *G_{αβ} = η(μF_{αβ} − ν*F_{αβ}) with some constant orthogonal matrix η ∈ O(k). In view of **F = −F they satisfy the linear relation
where the subscript c is mnemonic for ‘coupling’. If one now assumes that the column \((_G^F)\) transforms linearly under a faithful 2kdimensional real matrix representation c of Ġ, i.e. \((_G^F) \mapsto c{({{\bar g}^{ 1}})^T}(_G^F),\,\bar g \in \bar G\), one finds that Equation (3.2) transforms covariantly if \({\mathcal V_{\rm{c}}} \mapsto {\rm{c}}(\bar g){\mathcal V_{\rm{c}}}{h_{\rm{c}}}\), with an orthogonal matrix h_{c} and \({\rm{c}}({{\bar g}^{ 1}})T = \Upsilon {\rm{c}}(\bar g){\Upsilon ^{ 1}}\). Comparing this with the transformation law of the \({\bar G}\)valued coset representatives \({{\mathcal V}_{\ast}}\) (see e.g. [237]) one sees that these conditions are satisfied if \({\rm{c}}({{\mathcal V}_\ast}) = {{\mathcal V}_{\rm{c}}}\) and \({\rm{c}}(\bar \tau (\bar g)) = {\rm{c}}{({{\bar g}^{ 1}})^T},\bar g \in \bar G\), where \({\bar \tau}\) is the involution whose set of fixed points defines \({\bar H}\). Clearly this restricts the allowed cosets \(\bar G/\bar H\). For the admissible ones \({\rm{c}}({{\mathcal V}_{\ast}}) = {{\mathcal V}_{\rm{c}}}\) then determines the couplings \(\mu (\bar \varphi),\nu (\bar \varphi)\) as functions of the scalars. Since c is faithful the determination is unique for a given choice of section \({{\mathcal V}_{\ast}}\). Since \({{\mathcal V}_{\rm{c}}}{\mathcal V}_{\rm{c}}^T = {\rm{c(}}{{\mathcal V}_{\ast}}\bar \tau ({{\mathcal V}_{\rm{{\ast}}}}^{ 1}))\) the result does not dependent on the choice of section, i.e. \({{\tilde {\mathcal V}}_ {\ast}} = {{\mathcal V}_ {\ast}}h\) for some Hvalued function h determines the same \(\mu (\bar \varphi)\) and \(\nu (\bar \varphi)\). We refrain from presenting more details here, which can be found in [45, 46], since the result of the 2Killing vector reduction can be understood without them.
3.1.2 2Killing vector reduction
Concerning the reduction, we consider here only the case when both Killing vector fields K_{1}, K_{2} are spacelike everywhere and commuting. The other signature (one timelike and one spacelike Killing vector field) is most efficiently treated by relating it to the spacelike case via an Abelian Tduality transformation (see [154]). Alternatively one can perform the reduction in two steps and perform a suitable Hodge dualization inbetween (see [45, 56]).
Thus, from here on we take \({K_a} = K_a^\alpha {\partial _\alpha}\), a = 1, 2, to be Killing vector fields on the Lorentzian manifold \(({\mathcal M},g)\) that are spacelike everywhere and commuting: \({L_{{K_a}}}{g_{\alpha \beta}} = 0\) and [K_{1}, K_{2}] = 0. Their Lorentzian norms and inner product form a symmetric 2 × 2 matrix M = (M_{ab})_{1≤a,b≤2}. For the resulting three scalar fields on the 4D spacetime it is convenient to adopt a lapseshift type parameterization. This gives
In the general relativity literature the fields Δ > 0 and ψ are known as the real and imaginary parts of the “Ernst potential”. The parameterization (3.3) is chosen such that the (nonnegative) “area element” det M is the square of one of the fields. Taking the positive square root one has
By definition the metric g is left unchanged along the flow lines of the Killing vector fields. We denote the space of orbits by Σ. A projection operator onto the (co)tangent space to each point in Σ is given by \({\gamma _\alpha}^\beta : = {\delta _\alpha}^\beta  {M^{ab}}{K_{a\alpha}}{K_{a\alpha}}{K_b}^\beta\), where M^{ab} are the components of M^{−1} and \({K_{a\alpha}}: = {g_{\alpha \beta}}K_\alpha ^\beta\). The associated Lorentzian metric \({\gamma _{\alpha \beta}}: = {\gamma _\alpha}^{{\alpha\prime}}{\gamma _\beta}^{{\beta\prime}}{g_{{\alpha\prime}{\beta\prime}}} = {g_{\alpha \beta}}  {M^{ab}}{K_{a\alpha}}{K_{b\beta}}\) satisfies
Since \({\gamma _\alpha}^\beta\) is a projector of rank two, the metric γ_{αβ} has three independent components (not accounting for diffeomorphism redundancies). Generally one can show [90, 91] that there exists a onetoone correspondence between tensor fields on the “orbit space” (Σ, γ) and tensor fields on (\(({\mathcal M},g)\), g) with vanishing Lie derivative along \({K_a}^\alpha\) and which are “completely orthogonal” to \({K_a}^\alpha\). This will be used for the matter fields below. Given γ subject to Equation (3.5) and M one can reconstruct the original metric tensor as
The 10 components are parameterized by the 3 + 3 independent functions in γ and M. Each of these functions is constant along the flow lines of the Killing vector fields but may vary arbitrarily within Σ.
We deliberately refrained from picking coordinates so far to emphasize the geometric nature of the reduction. As usual however the choice of adapted coordinates is advantageous. We now pick (“Killing”) coordinates in which K_{a} acts as ∂/∂y^{a}, for a = 1, 2. In these coordinates the components of γ and M are independent of y^{1} and y^{2} and thus are functions of the remaining (nonunique “nonKilling”) coordinates x^{0} and x^{1} only. We write γ_{μν}(x), μ = 0, 1, for the components of γ in such a coordinate system. Since both Killing vectors are spacelike, γ_{μν} has eigenvalues (−, +) and can be brought into the form γ_{μν}(x) = e^{σ(x)}η_{μν}, by a change of the nonKilling coordinates, where η is the metric of flat 1 + 1dimensional Minkowski space. This can be taken to define σ. Alternatively one can introduce σ by
On the lefthandside is the (coordinateindependent) Lorentzian norm of the gradient of the 4D scalar field ρ; on the righthandside we evaluated this norm in the Killing coordinates where it must be proportional to γ^{μν}(x) ∂_{μ}ρ∂_{ν}ρ. Adjusting also the nonKilling coordinates then gives the rightmost expression in Equation (3.7), which could also be taken to define σ. The upshot is that the most general 4D metric with two commuting Killing vectors is parameterized by four scalar fields, ρ, σ and Δ, ψ. In the adapted coordinates the 4D metric then reads
As already mentioned, the fields Δ and ψ are known as the real and the imaginary part of the “Ernst potential”; we shall refer to ρ as the “area radius” associated with the two Killing vectors, and to σ as the conformal factor. To motivate the latter note that a Weyl transformation g_{αβ} → e^{ω}g_{αβ} of the 4D metric compatible with the 2Killing vectors amounts to the simultaneous rescalings γ_{μν}(x) → e^{ω(x)}γ_{μν}(x) and ρ(x) → e^{ω(x)}ρ(x).
The matter content in Equation (3.1) consists of the k Abelian gauge fields and the sigmamodel scalars \({{\bar \varphi}^i},\,i = 1, \ldots, \bar n\). For the scalars the reduction is trivial, and simply amounts to considering configurations constant in the Killing coordinates. For the gauge fields it turns out that the 4k components of \(B_\alpha ^{\hat \iota},\hat \iota = 1, \ldots, k\), î = 1, …,k, give rise to 2k fields A^{I}, I = 1, …, 2k, which transform as scalars under a change of the nonKilling coordinates (x^{0}, x^{1}). In brief this comes about as follows. The field equation ∇_{α}(μF^{αβ} − ν *F^{αβ}) = 0 for the gauge fields in Equation (3.1) can be interpreted as the Bianchi identity for a field strength G_{αβ} = ∂_{α}C_{β} − ∂_{β}C_{α} derived from dual potentials \(C_\alpha ^{\hat \iota},\hat \iota = 1, \ldots, k\). We can take one of the Killing vectors, say K = K_{1}, and built 2k spacetime scalars by contraction \({B^{\hat \iota}}: = B_\alpha ^{\hat \iota}{K^\alpha}\) and \({C^{\hat \iota}}: = C_\alpha ^{\hat \iota}{K^\alpha}\). Reduction with respect to the other Killing vector K_{2} just requires that these scalars are constant in the corresponding Killing coordinate y^{2}. The dependence on y^{1} is constrained by gauge invariance. If \(B_\alpha ^{\hat \iota} \mapsto B_\alpha ^{\hat \iota} + {\partial _\alpha}{b^{\hat \iota}}\) and \(C_\alpha ^i \mapsto C_\alpha ^i + {\partial _\alpha}{c^i}\), the scalars change by a term K^{α}∂_{α}b^{î} and K^{α}∂_{α}c^{î}, respectively, and hence are invariant under y^{1} independent gauge transformations. Thus, if the 4D gauge potentials and their duals, together with the corresponding transformations are taken to be independent of y^{1}, y^{2}, a set of gauge invariant scalars B^{î}(x) and C^{î}(x) arises. As a matter of fact a constant remnant of the gauge transformations remains and gives rise to a symmetry of the reduced system (see the discussion after Equation (3.11) below). We arrange the 2k fields B^{î}, C^{î} in a column vector A^{I}, I = 1,…,2k. For convenience we summarize the field content of the 2Killing vector subsector of Equation (3.1) in Table 1.
We combine all but ρ and σ into an \(n: = 2 + \bar n + 2k\) components scalar field
on the 2D orbit space with metric γ_{μν} and coordinates (x^{0}, x^{1}). A lengthy computation (which is best done in a two step procedure; see [45, 56]) gives the form of the action (3.1) on the field configurations compatible with the two Killing vectors. The result is
Here λ is the gravitational constant per unit volume of the internal space. One sees that the reduced action has the form of a 2D nonlinear sigmamodel nonminimally coupled to 2D gravity via the area radius ρ of the two Killing vectors. The target space of the sigmamodel has dimension \(n = 2 + \bar n + 2k\), we take Equation (3.9), viewed as a column, as field coordinates. With the normalization \({\left\langle {{{\bar J}_{\hat \alpha}},\,{{\bar J}_{\hat \beta}}} \right\rangle _{\bar {\rm{g}}}} = \bar {\mathfrak{m}_{ij}}\left({\bar \varphi} \right){\partial _{\hat \alpha}}{\bar \varphi ^i}{\partial _{\hat \beta}}{\bar \varphi ^j}\) the metric then comes out as
Here ϒ and \({{\mathcal V}_{\rm{c}}}\) are as in Equation (3.2) and q > 0 is a parameter used to adjust normalizations. The metric (3.11) has Riemannian signature (if the reduction was performed with respect to one spacelike and one timelike Killing vector it had 2k negative eigenvalues).
We briefly digress on the isometries of Equation (3.11). By virtue of the Ḡ invariance of the action m has dim Ḡ Killing vectors of which \(\bar n = \dim \bar G/\bar H\) are algebraically independent. Interestingly, the action (3.10) is also invariant under \(A \mapsto A + a,\,\psi \mapsto \psi  {q \over 2}{A^T}\Upsilon a\), with a constant 2k column a. These symmetries can be viewed as residual gauge transformations; note however that a compensating transformation of the gravitational potential ψ is needed. Finally constant translations in ψ and scale transformations \(\left({\Delta, {\mkern 1mu} \psi, {\mkern 1mu} \bar \varphi, {\mkern 1mu} A} \right) \mapsto \left({s\Delta, s\psi, {\mkern 1mu} \bar \varphi, {\mkern 1mu} {s^{1/2}}A} \right),{\mkern 1mu} s > 0\), are obvious symmetries of the action. The associated Killing vectors e, h of m generate a Borel subalgebra of sl_{2}, i.e. [h, e] = −2e. Together the metric (3.11) always has dim Ḡ + 2k + 2 Killing vectors.
In contrast the last sl_{2} generator f is only a Killing vector of m under certain conditions on \(\bar G/\bar H\). If these are satisfied a remarkable ‘csymmetry enhancement’ takes place in that m is the metric of a much larger symmetric space G/H, where G is a noncompact real form of a simple Lie group with dim G = dim Ḡ + 4k + dim SL(2). The point is that if f exists as Killing vector its commutator with the gauge transformations is nontrivial and yields 2k additional symmetries (generalized “Harrison transformations”). Since m always has dim Ḡ + 2k + 2 Killing vectors, the additional 1 + 2k then match the dimension of G. For the number of dependent Killing vectors, i.e. the dimension of the putative maximal subgroup H ⊂ G one expects \(\dim \,H = \dim \,\bar H + 1 + 2k\). Indeed under the conditions stated the symmetric space G/H exists and is uniquely determined by \(\bar G/\bar H\) (and the signature of the Killing vectors). See [45] for a complete list. Evidently the gauge fields are crucial for the symmetry enhancement. Among the systems in [45] only pure gravity has k = 0.
From now on we restrict attention to the cases where such a symmetry enhancement takes place. The scalars φ^{i} can then be arranged into a coset nonlinear sigmamodel whose \(2k + \bar n + 2\)dimensional target space is of the form G/H. Here G is always a simple noncompact Lie group and H a maximal subgroup; the coset is a Riemannian space with metric m_{ij}(φ). Being the metric of a symmetric space m enjoys the properties
which will be important later on. By construction G/H contains as subcosets the space SL(2, ℝ)/SO(2) on which the gravitational potentials are coordinates and the original coset \(\bar G/\bar H\) of the scalars \(\bar \varphi\):
A brief list of examples of 4D theories (3.1) and the cosets G/H they give rise to in Equation (3.10) is: Pure gravity in 4D corresponds to SL(2, ℝ)/SO(2), EinsteinMaxwell theory gives rise to SU(2,1)/S[U(2) × U(1)], a 4D Einsteindilatonaxion theory gives a coset SO(3, 2)/SO(3) × SO(2), and the reduction of N = 8 supergravity leads to a bosonic sector with E_{8(+8})/SO(16) coset.
The reduced classical field theories (3.10) have some remarkable properties which we discuss now:

1.
First, the field equations and the symplectic structure derived from Equation (3.11) coincide with the restriction of the field equations and the symplectic structure derived from Equation (3.1). In fact, this is a general feature of this type of symmetry reductions, and can be understood in terms of the “principle of symmetric criticality” [76].

2.
The field equations are classical integrable in the sense that they can be written as the compatibility condition of a pair of first order matrixvalued differential operators, depending on a free complex parameter. As a consequence large classes of solutions can be constructed analytically (see the books [26, 121, 98] and [103, 4] for detailed expositions).

3.
The classical integrability also entails that an infinite number of nonlocal conserved charges can be constructed explicitly. These are generalizations of the LuscherPohlmayer charges for the O(N) model. Moreover, these charges Poisson commute with the Hamiltonian and the diffeomorphism constraint that arise in a Hamiltonian (“ArnowittDeserMisnertype”) analysis of the covariant system (3.11). In other words, an infinite system of Dirac observables can be constructed explicitly as functionals of the metric and the matter fields! Given the fact that (apart from mass and angular momentum) not a single Dirac observable is known explicitly in full general relativity, this is a most remarkable feature.

4.
The system captures the crucial “spintwo” aspect of gravity. For example without matter the classical solutions comprise various types of (nonlinear) gravitational waves with two independent polarizations (per spacetime point).

5.
In conformal gauge, γ_{μν}(x) = e^{σ(x)}η_{μν}, the curvature term in Equation (3.11) is proportional to ∂^{μ}ρ∂_{μ}σ. Upon diagonalization, ∂^{μ}(ρ + σ)∂_{μ}(ρ + σ) − ∂^{μ}(ρ−σ)∂_{μ}(ρ − σ), this is proportional to a sum of two standard kinetic terms, one of which invariably has the ‘wrong sign’. Since a Weyl rescaling g_{αβ} ↦ e^{ω(x)}g_{αβ} of the metrics (3.3) amounts to ρ ↦ e^{ω}ρ, σ ↦ σ + ω this appears to reflect a conformal factor instability of the 4D gravitational action(s). Upon closer inspection it signals the absence of a genuine instability (see Section 3.2).
Taken together these properties make the 2Killing vector reductions a compelling laboratory to study the quantum aspect of the gravitational field.
3.1.3 Hamiltonian formulation
For later reference we also briefly outline the Hamiltonian formulation of the system. In a Hamiltonian formulation of this twodimensional diffeomorphism invariant system one fixes γ_{μν} = e^{σ}η_{μν} at the expense of a Hamiltonian constraint \({{\mathcal H}_0}\) and a diffeomorphism constraint \({{\mathcal H}_1}\). The properly normalized constraints come out of a lapse and shift decomposition of the form
The lapse n and the shift s here are spatial densities of weight −1, while e^{σ} carries weight 2. In Section 3.1.4 we collect some useful formulas which allows one to streamline the Hamiltonian analysis of 2D gravity theories.
Performing a standard Hamiltonian (“ADM type”) analysis based on Equation (3.10) and Equation (3.14), using the formulas of Section 3.2.3 one finds
with a selfexplanatory notation for the canonical momenta. The linear combinations T_{±±} are introduced for later use. The action (3.10) can then be recast in Hamiltonian form, where the Hamiltonian is, up to possible boundary terms, given by \(\int {dx} \left({n{{\mathcal H}_0} + s{{\mathcal H}_1}} \right)\). If boundary terms are present they are separately conserved local charges (see [197]). Note also that a constant ρ field trivializes the system in that ρ = const implies π_{σ} = 0, in which case the only solutions of the constraints are φ^{i} = const, π_{i}(φ) = 0. Then σ is harmonic function and e^{σ} can be set to unity by a conformal transformation. In other words, for ρ = const the only solutions of the classical field equations is Minkowski space with constant matter fields.
A shortcut to arrive at the constraints (3.15) is to start from the Lagrangian (3.10) in conformal gauge (γ_{μν} = e^{σ}η_{μν}, η = diag(−1, 1), using R(e^{σ}η) = − e^{−σ}∂^{2}σ),
and to work out the ‘would be’ energy momentum tensor T_{μν} of the Poincaré invariant Lagrangian (3.16). The relation between the velocities and the momenta then is of course different from that based on the lapse and shift analysis. However the Hamiltonian constraint \({{\mathcal H}_0}\) and the 1D diffeomorphism constraint \({{\mathcal H}_1}\), regarded as functions of the momenta, coincide with T_{00} and T_{01}, respectively, as derived from Equation (3.16) as the components of the energy momentum tensor. Note that the trace of the ‘wouldbe’ energy momentum tensor \(\lambda {T^\mu}_\mu =  2{\partial ^\mu}{\partial _\mu}\rho\) vanishes if the equation of motion ∂^{μ}∂_{μ}ρ = 0 of ρ is imposed. We shall freely switch back and forth between both interpretations of the constraints.
For the computation of the Poisson algebra it is convenient to put ρ onshell throughout (as its equation of motion ∂^{μ}∂_{μ}ρ = 0 is trivially solved) and to interpret the improvement terms in Equation (3.15) (here, those linear in the canonical variables) such that second time derivatives are eliminated. As expected, the \({{\mathcal H}_1}\) generates infinitesimal spatial reparameterizations and the covariance of the fields is a merely kinematical property. Explicitly a spatial density d(x) of weight s transforms as \(\left\{{{{\mathcal H}_1}\left(x \right),\,d\left(y \right)} \right\} = {\partial _1}d\delta \left({x  y} \right)  sd\left(y \right)\delta{\prime}\left({x  y} \right)\), the righthandside being the infinitesimal version of \(d(x) \rightarrow \tilde d({\tilde x}) = [{f{\prime}({\tilde x})}]^{ s}d({f({\tilde x})})\), under \(x \rightarrow \tilde x = {f^{ 1}}\left(x \right)\). The canonical momenta π_{ρ}, π_{σ}, π_{i} are spatial densities of weight s = 1, while \({{\mathcal H}_0},\,{{\mathcal H}_1}\), and e^{σ} are densities of weight 2. The Hamiltonian constraint on the other hand resumes its usual kinematicaldynamical double role.
The advantage of having the constraints defined with respect to the densitized lapse and shift functions (3.14) is that the Poisson algebra generated by \({{\mathcal H}_0}\) and \({{\mathcal H}_1}\) is a Lie algebra onshell, and equivalent to the algebra of 2D conformal transformations. (Otherwise it yields the algebra of “surface deformations”; cf. [214]). To illustrate the difference let us note that with only the ρ equation of motion imposed one computes
If also ∂_{∓}T_{±±} = 0 is imposed the first equation can be rewritten as
As expected, the T_{±±} generate infinitesimal conformal transformations on the basis fields ρ, σ, φ^{j}: {T_{±±}(x), d(y)} = ∂_{±}d(y)δ(x − y).
3.1.4 Lapse and shift in 2D gravity theories
Here we collect some useful formulas for 2D gravity theories in a lapse/shift parameterization of the metric, taken from [156]. As a byproduct we obtain a closed expression for the current K_{μ} of the Euler density \(\sqrt \gamma {R^{\left(2 \right)}}\left(\gamma \right) =  {\partial _\mu}{K_\mu}\) expressed in terms of the metric only. See [62] for a discussion. Our curvature conventions are the ones used throughout, the metric γ_{μν} has eigenvalues (−, +).
In 2D a ‘densitized’ lapseshift parameterization is convenient (see e.g. [197]),
The lapse n and the shift s here are spatial densities of weight −1, while e^{σ} carries weight 2. The rationale for this densitized lapse and shift parameterization is that the associated constraints automatically generate the proper Lie algebra of surface deformations (see [214, 197]). Using
one checks that the Hamiltonian associated with a free field Lagrangian \( {1 \over 2}\sqrt { \gamma} {\gamma ^{\mu \nu}}{\partial _\mu}\phi {\partial _\nu}\phi\) is \({n \over 2}\left[ {\pi _\phi ^2 + {{\left({{\partial _1}\phi} \right)}^2}} \right] + s{\partial _1}\phi {\pi _\phi}\), as it should be. Evaluating \(\sqrt { \gamma} {R^{\left(2 \right)}}\left(\gamma \right)\) in this parameterization gives the following expression (which we were unable to locate in the literature):
It can be rewritten as
where ϵ_{01} = −ϵ_{10} = 1 = −ϵ^{01} = ϵ^{10}.
This provides an explicit though noncovariant expression for the current K^{μ} in terms of the metric. Related formulas either invoke the zweibein or use an explicit parameterization. The one given in [62] is based on an SL(2, ℝ) type parameterization of \({\gamma _{\mu \nu}}/\sqrt { \gamma}\) and is equivalent to Equation (3.22). Compared to Equation (2.11) in [62] a curl term ϵ^{μν}∂_{ν}ϕ has been added which allows one to express K^{μ} solely in terms of the metric. Another advantage of Equation (3.22) is that the separation in dynamical and nondynamical variables is manifest: K^{μ} is a function of det γ and the combination \(\sqrt { \gamma} {\gamma ^{\mu \nu}}\) only; the former is the dynamical variable, the latter can be parameterized in terms of the lapse and shift functions. They can be anticipated to be nondynamical in that no time derivatives of lapse and shift appear in K^{μ}, as is manifest from Equation (3.21).
In the actions considered the term \(\sqrt { \gamma} {R^{\left(2 \right)}}\left(\gamma \right)\) always multiplies a scalar field ρ, say. Using Equation (3.20) the Hamiltonian associated with an Lagrangian of the form
is readily worked out. As a function of the momenta \({\pi _\rho} =  {1 \over n}\left({{\partial _0}\sigma  s{\partial _1}\sigma  2{\partial _1}s} \right)\) and \({\pi _\sigma} = {1 \over n}\left({ {\partial _0}\rho + s{\partial _1}\rho} \right)\), one has \(\rho \sqrt { \gamma} {R^{\left(2 \right)}}\left(\gamma \right) \simeq n\left[ { {\pi _\rho}{\pi _\sigma} + {\partial _1}\rho {\partial _1}\sigma  2\partial _1^2\sigma} \right]\), where ‘≃’ denotes ‘modulo total derivatives’. For the Hamiltonian this gives
The Poisson algebra of the constraints \({{\mathcal H}_0},\,{{\mathcal H}_1}\) is the algebra of surface deformations, as required. Alternatively the form (3.22) can be used beforehand to get
where ≃ denotes again ‘modulo total derivatives’.
3.1.5 Symmetries and currents
Later on we aim at a Dirac quantization of the 2Killing subsector of the theories (3.1). The functional measure is then defined with the reduced Lagrangian (3.16) in conformal gauge, and a quantum version of the constraints \({{\mathcal H}_0} \pm \,{{\mathcal H}_1}\) is imposed subsequently. For the renormalization the symmetries of the Lagrangian (3.16) are crucial. The G invariance of course gives rise to a set of Lie algebra valued Noether currents J_{μ}. Let t_{a}, a = 1, …, dim G, denote a basis of the Lie algebra with Killing form 〈, 〉_{g}. Let further \({Y_a} = Y_a^i\left(\varphi \right)\partial/\partial {\varphi ^i}\) denote the Killing vectors of m. Then we define J_{μ} through its projection onto the basis t_{a}, via
From the equation of motion for φ and the Killing vector equation one readily checks that ∂^{μ}(_{ρ}J_{μ}) = 0. Further, the invariance of Equation (3.16) under constant shifts in σ gives the trivial current ∂_{μρ}.
More interestingly there are two ‘conformal currents’ which are not conserved onshell but whose divergence reproduces the Lagrangian (3.16) up to a multiple
In fact, C_{μ} and D_{μ} are the only currents with that property. Their origin are the following scaling relations,
where L is the Lagrangian (3.16). The parameter c is arbitrary, c = −1/2 matches the algebra of the conformal Killing vectors in Section 3.3, and c = 1 corresponds to scale g_{αβ} ↦ ω^{2}g_{αβ} transformations of the original 4D metric (3.6). Since for the action (3.10) the response under such a rescaling vanishes onshell (see Equation (1.1)), the inessential nature of Newton’s constant is preserved by the reduction and remains visible through the conformal current C_{μ} in the gauge fixed Lagrangian (3.16).
Finally there exists an infinite set of nonlocal conserved currents whose charges are Dirac observables and which be constructed explicitly(!) in terms of the dynamical fields, that is, without having to solve the field equations. These currents can be found by different techniques similar to those used in nonlinear sigmamodels [150, 124]. For illustration we present the lowest one which is (for all onshell configurations) defined in terms of the dual potentials ∂_{μ}χ ≔ −ϵ_{μν}ρJ^{ν} and \({\partial _\mu}\tilde \rho : =  {\epsilon _{\mu \nu}}{\rho ^\nu}\), with ϵ_{01} = −ϵ_{10} = 1. Then
It may be worthwhile to point out what is trivial and what is nontrivial about the relations (3.29). Once the expression for the current \({{\mathcal J}_\mu}\) is known it is trivial to verify its conservation using the definition of the potentials χ and \(\tilde \rho\). Since \({{\mathcal H}_0}\) generates time translations on the basis fields ρ, σ, φ^{i} the associated conserved charge Poisson commutes with \({{\mathcal H}_0}\) (and trivially with \({{\mathcal H}_1}\)) and thus qualifies as a genuine Dirac observable. What is nontrivial about Equation (3.29) is that a Dirac observable can be constructed explicitly in a way that does not require a solution of the Cauchy problem. The potentials χ, \(\tilde \rho\) are only defined onshell but one does not need to know how they are parameterized by initial data. In stark contrast the known abstract construction principles for Dirac observables in full general relativity always refer to a solution of the Cauchy problem (see [70] for a recent account). The bonus feature of the 2Killing vector reduction that allows for this feat is the existence of a solution generating group [90, 91] (“Geroch group”) and, related to it, the existence of a Lax pair. The latter allows one to convert the Cauchy problem into a linear singular integral equation [4, 103] (which is still nontrivial to solve) and at the same time it underlies the techniques used to find an infinite set of nonlocal conserved currents of which the one in Equation (3.29) is the lowest (least nonlinear) one.
In the quantum theory, a construction of observables from first principles has not yet been achieved. Existence of a quantum counterpart of the first charge (3.29) would already be a very nontrivial indication for the quantum integrability of the systems. For its construction the procedure of Lüscher [139] could be adopted. Independent of this, the ‘exact’ bootstrap formulation of [158] shows that the existence of a ‘complete’ set of quantum obeservables is compatible with the quantum integrability of the system.
3.2 Collinear gravitons, Dirac quantization, and conformal factor
In this section, taken from [156], we discuss a number of structural issues of the 2 + 2 truncations and advocate that, as far as the investigation of the renormalization properties is concerned, the use of a proper time or Dirac quantization is the method of choice. We begin by describing what conventional graviton perturbation theory looks like in this sector.
3.2.1 Collinear gravitons
Performing a standard expansion g_{αβ} = η_{αβ} + f_{αβ}, 0 ≤ α, β ≤ 3, around the metric η_{αβ} of Minkowski space the quadratic part of the EinsteinHilbert action \(\int {{d^4}x\sqrt { g} R\left(g \right)}\) reads
Indices are raised with η^{αβ}. In the second part of Equation (3.30) we decomposed f_{αβ} into its trace \(f: = {f^\alpha}_\alpha\) and a trace free part \(f_{\alpha \beta}^{{\rm{TF}}}: = {f_{\alpha \beta}}  {1 \over 4}{\eta _{\alpha \beta}}f\). A critical discussion of the reconstruction of the nonlinear theory from the linear one can be found in [164]; a proper time formulation of the linearized quantum theory has been given in [141]. In the present conventions a scalar action of the form \(S =  {1 \over 2}\int {{d^4}x\left[ {{\partial ^\alpha}\phi {\partial _\alpha}\phi + {m^2}{\phi ^2}} \right]}\) has a positive semidefinite Hamiltonian. The kinetic term for the trace f thus has the ‘wrong’ sign, which reflects the conformal factor instability. One readily checks the invariance of the action (3.30) under the gauge transformations
with ξ_{α} a being Lorentz covector field. The field equations of Equation (3.30) are
The 2Killing vector reduction of the action (3.30) amounts to considering field configurations obeying \({\mathcal{L}_{{K_1}}}{f_{\alpha \beta}} = 0 = {\mathcal{L}_{{K_2}}}{g_{\alpha \beta}}\) (which is equivalent to g_{αβ} = η_{αβ} + f_{αβ} having two Killing vectors). In adapted coordinates where K_{a} = ∂/∂y^{a}, a = 1, 2, the metric components depend only on the nonKilling coordinates (x^{0}, x^{1}). Moreover f_{αβ} can be assumed to be blockdiagonal
where μ, ν ∈ {0, 1}, a, b ∈ {2, 3}, and η_{μν} has eigenvalues (−, +). The component fields f_{22}, f_{33}, f_{23} retain their interpretation as parameterizing the norms and inner product of the Killing vectors, i.e. K_{1} · K_{1} = 1 + f_{22}, K_{2} · K_{2} = 1 + f_{22}, K_{1} · K_{2} = f_{23}. Since (K_{1} · K_{1})(K_{2} · K_{2}) − (K_{1} · K_{2})^{2} = 1 + f_{22} + f_{33} + O(f^{2}) is nonlinear in the perturbations, a (re)parameterization in terms of a radius field ρ as in the nonlinear theory is less useful. Nevertheless the combination f_{22} + f_{33} will play a special role later on.
Entering with the ansatz (3.33) into Equation (3.30) gives the reduced action
Here the Greek indices μ, ν,… are raised with η^{μν}, and the latin a, b,… with δ^{ab}. As in Equation (3.10) we also included Newton’s constant per unit volume of the internal space as a prefactor. The second line of Equation (3.34) is the counterpart of the second line of Equation (3.30) and we wrote
where \({\eta ^{\mu \nu}}f_{\mu \nu}^T = 0 = {\delta ^{ab}}f_{ab}^T\) are the individually tracefree parts of the blocks in Equation (3.33). Their traces \({f^\mu}_\mu\) and \({f^a}_a\) have been replaced by k and \(f = {f^\alpha}_\alpha = {f^\mu}_\mu + {f^a}_a\) in Equation (3.34). The wrong sign of the trace component f of course remains.
We add some remarks. As one might expect, the action (3.34) can also be obtained by “first reducing” and then “linearizing”. Indeed, from Equation (3.50) below one has
modulo total derivatives, and with the identifications
one recovers (3.34) from Equation (3.10). Second, the action (3.34) is invariant under the gauge transformations
which corresponds to Lorentz vector fields ξ_{α} of the form ξ_{α} = (ξ_{μ}(x^{0}, x^{1}), 0, 0). In addition there are the remnants of the SL(2, ℝ)/SO(2) isometries which now generate the isometries group ISO(2) of ℝ^{2}: two translations f_{22} ↦ f_{22} + a_{1}, f_{33} ↦ f_{33} − a_{1} and f_{23} ↦ f_{23} + a_{2}, and one rotation
with α constant and modulo O(α^{2}) terms.
Further the operations “varying the action” and “reduction” are commuting, as expected from the principle of symmetric criticality. Thus, the reduction of the field equations (3.32) coincides with the field equations obtained by varying Equation (3.34). The latter are
with ∂^{2} = η^{μν}∂_{μ}∂_{ν}. These are equivalent to ∂^{2}f_{23} = ∂^{2}f_{22} = ∂^{2}f_{33} = 0, (∂^{μ}∂^{ν} − η^{μν}∂^{2})f_{μν} = 0, and
for integration constants v_{μ} and v_{0}. A nonzero v_{μ} (which is not corotated) violates Poincaré invariance and is undesirable for most purposes. Equation (3.37) shows that on shell only two of the three free fields f_{22}, f_{33}, f_{23} are independent. In fact, in a Hamiltonian formulation of Equation (3.34) the condition f_{22} + f_{33} = const can be understood as a constraint associated with the gauge invariance (3.36). Equivalently it can be viewed as a remnant of the constraints (3.15). Indeed, to linear order \({{\mathcal H}_0} =  2\partial _1^2\rho/\lambda, \,{{\mathcal H}_1} =  2{\partial _1}{\pi _\sigma}\), with π_{σ} = ∂_{0}ρ, which combined with Equation (3.37) gives f_{22} + f_{33} = const, once again.
For the special case of the EinsteinRosen waves an onshell formulation suffices and a related study linking the ‘graviton modes’ to the ‘EinsteinRosen modes’ can be found in [23].
The linearized theory is well suited to discuss the physics content of the 2Killing vector reduction. To this end one fixes the gauge and displays the independent onshell degrees of freedom. The most widely used gauge in the linearized theory (3.30) is the transversaltraceless gauge,
The first condition is the “harmonic gauge condition”, the others are “transversaltraceless” conditions. Using the latter in the former gives ∂_{i}f_{ij} = 0, with i, j ∈ {1, 2, 3}. Thus Equation (3.42) removes 3 + 4 + 1 degrees of freedom of the 10 components of f_{αβ} leaving the familar 2 graviton degrees of freedom. In the 2Killing subsector the gauge conditions read
Using again the second set in the harmonic gauge condition gives f_{22} + f_{33} = const. Thus Equation (3.43) removes 1 + 3 of the 6 degrees of freedom in f_{μν}, f_{ab}, leaving again the familiar two ‘graviton’ degrees of freedom, f_{22}, f_{23}, say. The only difference to the physical degrees of freedom of the full linearized theory (3.30) is that all wave vectors are aligned, that is, the gravitons are collinear. To see this recall that the general solution of Equation (3.32) subject to Equation (3.42) is a superposition of plane waves \({f_{\alpha \beta}}\left(x \right) = {A_{\alpha \beta}}\left(k \right){e^{i{k_\gamma}{x^\gamma}}} + {\rm{c}}.{\rm{c}}.\), with k_{γ}k^{γ} = 0 and A_{αβ}(k) constrained by Equation (3.42). Both the action (3.30) and the field equations (3.31) are Poincaré invariant, so any one wave vector in a superposition can be fixed to have the form k = (k_{0}, k_{1}, 0, 0), with k_{μ}k^{μ} = 0. Identifying (x^{0}, x^{1}) with the nonKilling coordinates and (x^{2}, x^{3}) with the Killing coordinates (y^{2}, y^{3}), the waves in the 2Killing subsector are of identically the same form; the only difference is that now all of the wave vectors have the form k = (k_{0}, k_{1}, 0, 0). In other words, all waves move in the same or in the opposite direction; they are collinear. This collinearity of the wave vectors must of course not be confused with the alignment of the polarization vectors; the polarization tensor A_{αβ}(k) here always carries two independent polarizations. Nontrivial scattering is possible despite the collinearity of the waves. It should be interesting to compute this Smatrix and to contrast it with the one in the Eikonal sector [209, 113, 73, 71].
In summary we conclude that the 2Killing vector subsector comprises the gravitational selfinteraction of collinear gravitons, in the same sense as the full EinsteinHilbert action describes the selfinteraction of noncollinear gravitons.
The formulation of the perturbative functional integral in this subsector would now proceed in exact parallel to the noncollinear case: A gauge fixing term
implementing the harmonic gauge condition is added to the action. This renders the kinetic term in Equation (3.34) nondegenerate. The extra propagating degrees of freedom are then ‘canceled out’ by the FaddeevPopov determinant. In principle a systematic collinear graviton loop expansion could be set up in this way, much in parallel to the generic noncollinear case.
3.2.2 Dirac versus covariant quantization
For the systems at hand we now want to argue that this is not the method of choice. To this end we return to the covariant action (3.10) and decompose γ_{μν} into a conformal factor e^{σ} and a twoparametric remainder \({\hat \gamma _{\mu \nu}}\) to be adjusted later, \({\gamma _{\mu \nu}} = {e^\sigma}{\hat \gamma _{\mu \nu}}\). Using \({R^{\left(2 \right)}}\left({{e^\sigma}\hat \gamma} \right) = {e^{ \sigma}}\left[ {{R^{\left(2 \right)}}\left({\hat \gamma} \right)  {{\hat \gamma}^{\mu \nu}}{{\hat \nabla}^\mu}{{\hat \nabla}^\nu}\sigma} \right]\) we can rewrite Equation (3.10) as a gravity theory for the twoparametric \({\hat \gamma _{\mu \nu}}\)
There are two instructive choices for \({\hat \gamma _{\mu \nu}}\),
The first choice is the densitized lapseshift parameterization already used before (see Section 3.1.4). This is adapted to a proper time or Dirac quantization: The lapse n and shift s are classically nonpropagating degrees of freedom. In a Dirac quantization one can simply fix the temporal gauge (n =1, s = 0) and use the nondegenerate gaugefixed action in Equation (3.45) to define the quantum theory. The Hamiltonian and diffeomorphism constraint arising from the gauge fixing then have to be defined as composite operators.
The choice (3.47) is adapted to a covariant quantization. Here \({\hat \gamma _{\mu \nu}}{e^{\bar \sigma}}\) is a generic (offshell) background metric with again the conformal mode \(\bar \sigma\) split off. The fluctuation field \(f_{\mu \nu}^T\) is tracefree with respect to the background \({\bar \gamma ^{\mu \nu}}f_{\mu \nu}^T = 0\). Then Equation (3.45) describes a unimodular gravity theory \(\left({\det \,{e^{{f^T}}} = 1} \right)\) and the original metric is parameterized by \(f_{\mu \nu}^T\) and \({f_\sigma}: = \sigma  \bar \sigma\) as \({\gamma _{\mu \nu}} = {\bar \gamma _{\mu \rho}}{\left({{e^{{f^T}}}} \right)^\rho}_\nu {e^{{f_\sigma}}}\). In a covariant formulation the degrees of freedom in f^{T} would be promoted to propagating ones by adding a gauge fixing term to the action (3.45). The associated FaddeevPopov determinant is designed to cancel out their effect again. In the case at hand this is clearly roundabout as the gaugefrozen Lagrangian (3.45) is already nondegenerate.
This setting can be promoted to a generalization of the one presented in Section 3.1.2 to generic backgrounds. In the terminology of Section B.2 one then gets a nongeodesic backgroundfluctuation split, which treats the nonpropagating lapse and shift degrees of freedom on an equal footing with the others. In order to contrast it with the geodesic backgroundfluctuation split for the propagating modes used later on, we spell out here the first few steps of such a procedure.
We wish to expand the EinsteinHilbert action for the class of metrics (3.6) around a generic background. Technically it is simpler to “first reduce” and then “expand”. This is legitimate since all operations involved are algebraic. Recall that the reduced Lagrangian is defined by inserting the ansatz
with γ_{μν}, for example, in the above lapseshift parameterization into the EinsteinHilbert Lagrangian. This gives Equation (3.10). For the 2D metric a convenient parameterization of the fluctuations around a generic background is Equation (3.47) which for γ_{μν} amounts to
where \({\bar \gamma ^{\mu \nu}}f_{\mu \nu}^T = 0\) and indices are raised and with the (inverse) background metric \({\bar \gamma _{\mu \nu}}\). Since \({\bar \gamma _{\mu \nu}}\) is diffeomorphic to \({e^{\bar \sigma}}\) one has \(\sigma = \bar \sigma + {f_\sigma}\).
The counterpart of Equation (3.49) for the lower 2 × 2 block in Equation (3.48) is
where \({\bar M^{ab}}f_{ab}^T = 0\). Writing \(\bar \rho = \sqrt {\det \,\bar M}\) one has \(\rho = \bar \rho {e^{{f_\rho}}}\). The tracefree part \(f_{ab}^T\) defines an element of the Lie algebra of SL(2, ℝ), though in a nonstandard basis. Writing
one finds \({M_{ab}} = {\bar M_{ab}} + f_{ab}^T + {f_\rho}{\bar M_{ab}} + O\left({{f^2}} \right)\), with
The decomposition (3.49, 3.50) can be viewed as the counterpart of the York decomposion for the metrics (3.6). Note that conventional linear background fluctuation split would only keep the leading terms in Equations (3.49, 3.50) and base the expansion on this split.
Writing L_{EH}(g) for EinsteinHilbert Lagrangian with the blockdiagonal metric (3.48) one arrives at an expansion of the form
where L_{n} is of order n in the fluctuations. This holds both when a Yorktype decomposition is adopted and when a linear split is used, just the higher order terms L_{n}, n ≥ 3, get reshuffled. We won’t need their explicit form; the point relevant here is the invariance of L_{2} under the genuine gauge transformations in f_{μν} and the background counterpart of the ISO(2) rotations (3.39). The genuine gauge invariance has to be gaugefixed in order to get nondegenerate kinetic terms. The standard gauge fixing is the background covariant harmonic one, \({\bar \nabla ^\mu}\left({{f_{\mu \nu}}  {1 \over 2}{{\bar \gamma}_{\mu \nu}}{{\bar \gamma}^{\rho \sigma}}{f_{\rho \sigma}}} \right) = 0\). The extra propagating degrees of freedom are canceled by the FaddeevPopov determinant, and the construction of the perturbative functional integral proceeds as usual. One can take as the central object in the quantum theory the background effective action \({\Gamma _{\rm{B}}}\left[ {\left\langle {{\gamma _{\mu \nu}}} \right\rangle, \,\left\langle {{M_{ab}}} \right\rangle; \,{{\bar \gamma}_{\mu \nu}},\,{{\bar M}_{ab}}} \right]\), which as far as the symmetries are concerned of the type characteristic for a linear backgroundfluctuation split. Note that this feature would not change if a nonperturbative construction of \({\Gamma _{\rm{B}}}\left[ {\left\langle {{\gamma _{\mu \nu}}} \right\rangle, \,\left\langle {{M_{ab}}} \right\rangle; \,{{\bar \gamma}_{\mu \nu}},\,{{\bar M}_{ab}}} \right]\) was aimed at, for example via a functional renormalization group equation.
In all cases one sees that the procedure outlined has two drawbacks. First, the split (3.49) ignores the special status of the lapse and shift degrees of freedom in γ_{μν}; all components are expanded. We know, however, that there must be two infinite series built from the components of \({\bar \gamma _{\mu \nu}}\) and f_{μν} that enter the lefthandside of Equation (3.53) anyhow linearly. Concerning the lower 2 × 2 block in Equation (3.48) both the linear and the Yorktype decomposition will only keep the ISO(2) symmetry more or less manifest. The nonlinear realization of the SL(2, ℝ) symmetry then has to be restored through Ward identites, iteratively in a perturbative formulation or otherwise in a nonperturbative one.
In the following we shall adopt the following remedies. The fact that the lapse and shift degrees of freedom in γ_{μν} enter the lefthandside of Equation (3.53) linearly of course just means that they are the Lagrange multipliers of the constraints in a Hamiltonian formulation. The linearity can thus be exploited either by a gauge fixing with respect to these variables before expanding, giving rise to a proper time formulation, or by directly adopting a Dirac quantization prodecure. By and large both should be eqaivalent; in [154, 155] a direct Dirac quantization was used, and we shall describe the results in the next two Sections 3.3 and 3.4. With the lapse and shift in Equation (3.14) ‘gone’ one only needs to perform a backgroundfluctuation split only for the remaining propagating fields Δ, ψ, ρ, σ.
To cope with the second of the beforementioned drawbacks we equip — following deWitt and Vilkovisky — this space of propagating fields with a pseudoRiemannian metric and perform a normalcoordinate expansion around a (‘background’) point with respect to it. This leads to the formalism summarized in Section B.2.2. The pseudoRiemannian metric on the space of propagating fields can be read off from Equation (3.16) and converts the gaugefrozen but nondegenerate Lagrangian into that of a (pseudo)Riemannian nonlinearsigma model. The renormalization theory of these systems is well understood and we summarize the aspects needed here in Section B.3. In exchange for the gaugefreezing one then has to define quantum counterparts of the constraints (3.15) as renormalized composite operators. This will be done in Equations (3.100) ff.
For the sake of comparison with Equations (3.49, 3.51) we display here the first two terms of the resulting geodesic backgroundfluctuation split:
Here \(\bar \phi = \left({\bar \Delta, \,\bar \psi, \,\bar \rho, \,\bar \sigma} \right)\) is the reference point in field space and (ξ^{1}, ξ^{2}, ξ^{3}, ξ^{4}) is the tangent vector at \(\bar \phi\) to the geodesic connecting \(\bar \phi\) and ϕ = (Δ, ψ, ρ, σ); the dots indicate terms of cubic and higher order in the ξ^{i}. The geodesic in question is defined with respect to the pseudoRiemannian metric in field space ɧ_{ij} (see Equation (3.60) below). This metric in field space possesses a number of Killing vectors Y (not to be confused with the Killing vectors of the spacetime geometries considered) and two conformal Killing vectors related to Equation (3.27). A major advantage of the geodesic background fluctuation split is that the associated generalized Ward identities are built into the formalism. Indeed the diffeomorphism Ward identities (B.24, B.39) become Ward identites proper for the isometries of the target space and “conformal” generalizations thereof for the conformal isometries.
In summary, we find the following differences to standard perturbation theory:

1.
Lapse and shift viewed as infinite series in the fluctuation field are not expanded. Only the metric degrees of freedom other than lapse and shift are expanded.

2.
Through the use of the background effective action formalism the expectation of the quantum metric 〈g_{αβ}〉 and the background \({\bar g_{\alpha \beta}}\) are related by the condition
$${{\delta {\Gamma _{\rm{B}}}[\langle {g_{\alpha \beta}}\rangle;{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}]} \over {\delta \langle {g_{\alpha \beta}}\rangle}} = 0.$$((3.55))One does not expand around a solution of the classical field equations.

3.
Through the use of a geodesic backgroundfluctuation split on the space of propagating fields the resulting background effective action is in principle invariant under arbitary local reparameterizations of the propagating fields. Among those the ones associated with isometries or conformal isometries on field space are of special interest and give rise to Ward identities associated with the Noether currents (3.26) and the conformal currents (3.27). The latter are built into the formalism, and do not have to be imposed order by order.
The first point entails that the sigmamodel perturbation theory we are going to use is partially nonperturbative from the viewpoint of a standard graviton loop expansion.
3.2.3 Conformal factor
Before turning to the quantum theory of these warped product sigmamodels we briefy discuss the status of the conformal factor instability in a covariant formulation of the 2 + 2 truncation. As emphazised by Mazur and Mottola [142] in linearized Euclidean quantum Einstein Gravity (based on the Euclidean version of the action (3.30)) there is really no conformal factor instability. The f ∂^{2}f kinetic term in the second part of Equation (3.30) with the wrong sign receives an extra contribution from the measure which after switching to gauge invariant variables renders both the Gaussian functional integral over the conformal factor and that for the physical degrees of freedom welldefined. They also gave a structural argument why this should be so even on a nonlinear level: As one can see from a canonical formulation the conformal factor in Einstein gravity is really a constrained degree of freedom and should not have a canonically conjugate momentum.
In the 2 + 2 truncation we shall use a Lorentzian functional integral defined through the sigmamodel perturbation theory outlined above. So a conformal factor instability proper associated with a Euclidean functional integral anyhow does not arise. Nevertheless it is instructive to trace the fate of the incriminated f ∂^{2}f term.
From the Yorktype decomposition (3.49, 3.50) one sees that \({f_\sigma} + {f_\rho} = {1 \over 2}\left({{f^\mu}_\mu + {f^a}_a} \right) = :{1 \over 2}f\) plays the role of the (gaugevariant) conformal factor. The wrong sign kinetic term is indeed still present in the second part of Equation (3.34) and f also appears through a dilaton type coupling in the \(f_{\mu \nu}^T{\partial _\mu}{\partial _\nu}\left({k  f} \right)\) term. In 2D however \(f_{\mu \nu}^T\) has no propagating degrees of freedom and the term could be taken care of promoting \(f_{\mu \nu}^T\) to a dynamical degree of freedom via gauge fixing and then cancelling the effect by a FaddeevPopov determinant. As already argued before it is better to avoid this and look at the remaining propagating degrees of freedom directly. They simplify when reexpressed in terms of f_{ρ} = (f + k)/4 and f_{σ} = (f − k)/4, viz. \({1 \over 4}\partial k\partial f + {1 \over 8}{\left({\partial k} \right)^2}  {3 \over 8}{\left({\partial f} \right)^2} =  4\partial {f_\sigma}\partial {f_\rho}  2{\left({\partial {f_\rho}} \right)^2}\). This occurs here on the linearized level but comparing with Equation (3.16) one sees that the same structure is present in the full gaugefrozen action. We thus consider from now on directly the corresponding terms proportional to −∂ρ∂(σ + ½ ln ρ). By a local redefinition of σ one can eliminate the term quadratic in ρ and in dimensional regularization used later no Jacobian arises. One is left with a −∂ρ∂σ term which upon diagonalization gives rise to one field whose kinetic term has the wrong sign. However ρ is a dilaton type field which multiplies all of the selfinteracting positive energy scalars in the first term of Equation (3.16), and the dynamics of this mode turns out to be very special (see Section 3.3). Heuristically this can be seen by viewing the σ field in the Lorentzian functional integral simply as a Lagrange multiplier for a δ(∂^{2}ρ) insertion. The remaining Lorentzian functional integral would allow for a conventional Wick rotation with a manifestly bounded Euclidean action. We expect that roughly along these lines a nonperturbative definition of the functional integral for Equation (3.16) could be given, which would clearly be one without any conformal factor instability. Within the perturbative construction used in Section 3.3 the special status of the ∂^{2}ρ field, viewed as a renormalized operator, can be verified. Since the system is renormalizable only with infinitely many couplings, the functional dependence on ρ in the renormalized Lagrangian and in the ∂^{2}ρ field has to be ‘deformed’ in a systematic way; however this does not affect the principle aspect that no instability occurs.
Finally, let us briefly comment on the role of Newton’s constant and of the cosmological constant in the 2 + 2 truncations. The gravity part of the action (3.10) or (3.45) arises from evaluating the EinsteinHilbert action S_{eh} on the class of metrics (3.6). The constant 1/λ in Equation (3.10, 3.45) can be identified with d^{2}y/g_{N}, i.e. with Newton’s constant per unit volume of the orbits. As such λ is an inessential parameter and its running is defined only relative to a reference operator. For the 2 + 2 truncations it turns out that the way how the action (3.10) depends on ρ has to be modified in a nontrivial and scale dependent way by a function h(·) (see Equation (3.56) below) in order to achieve strict cutoff independence. This modification amounts to the inclusion of infinitely many essential couplings, only the overall scale of h(·) remains an inessential parameter. It is thus convenient not to renormalize this overall scale and to treat λ in Equation (3.56) as a loop counting parameter.
A similar remark applies to the cosmological constant. Adding a cosmological constant term to the Ricci scalar term results in a Λ ρe^{σ} type addition to Equation (3.56) below. In the quantum theory one is again forced to replace ρ with an scale dependent function f(ρ) in order to achieve strict cutoff independence [156]. The cosmological constant proper can be identified with the overall scale of the function f(·). The function f is subject to a nonautonomous flow equation, triggered by h, but if its initial value is set to zero it remains zero in the course of the flow [156]. To simplify the exposition we thus set f ≡ 0 from the beginning and omit the cosmological constant term in the following. It is however a nontrivial statement that this can be be done in a way compatible with the renormalization flow.
3.3 Tamed nonrenormalizability
For the reasons explained in the Appendices B.2.2 and B.3 we now study the quantum theory based on the sigmamodel Lagrangian (3.16) in the setting of the covariant background field expansion. Since this is a welltested formalism (see Section B.3) it has the additional advantage that any unexpected findings cannot be blamed on the use of an untested formalism. Technically it is also convenient to use dimensional regularization and minimal subtraction. The analysis can then be done to all orders of sigmamodel perturbation theory.
Our first goal thus is to construct the infinite cutoff limit of the background effective action \({\lim\nolimits _{\Lambda \rightarrow \infty}}{\Gamma _\Lambda}\left[ {\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle, \,{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}} \right]\) in the covariant background field formalism to all orders of the loop expansion. It turns out that this can be done only if infinitely many essential couplings are allowed, so even the trunctated functional integral based on Equation (3.16) is not renormalizable in the strict sense. However, once one allows for infinitely couplings strict cutoff independence (Λ → ∞) can be achieved. Remarkably, for Equation (3.1) the generalized beta function for a generating functional of these couplings can be found in closed form (see Equation (3.88) below). This allows one to study their RG flow in detail and to prove the existence of a nonGaussian UV stable fixed point. One also finds a Gaussian fixed point which is not UV stable.
The main principle guiding the renormalization are generalized Ward identities for the Noether currents (3.26) and the conformal currents (3.27). The general solution of these generalized Ward identities suggests a space of actions which is stable under the renormalization flow. One finds that by suitable redefinitions the general solution can always be brought into the form
Here h is the generating functional for an infinite set of couplings; it defines a function of one real variable whose argument in Equation (3.56) is the field ρ. The fact that the renormalization flow does not force one to leave the (infinitedimensional) space of actions, Equation (3.56) of course has to be justified by explicit construction. Below we shall show this in renormalized perturbation theory to all loop orders. Since the ansatz (3.56) is based on a symmetry characterization is seems plausible, however, that also a nonperturbatively constructed flow would not force one to leave the space (3.56), though one could certainly start off with a more general ansatz containing for example higher derivative terms.
As described above in the sigmamodel perturbation theory we use dimensional regularization and minimal subtraction. Counter terms will then have poles in d − 2 rather than containing positive powers of the cutoff Λ. The role of the scale k is played by the renormalization scale μ, the fields and the couplings at the cutoff scale are called the “bare” fields and the “bare” couplings, while the fields and couplings at scale μ are referred to as “renormalized”. The fact that the ansatz (3.56) ‘works’ is expressed in the following result:
Result (Generalized renormalizability) [154, 155]:
To all orders in the sigmamodel loop expansion there exist nonlinear field renormalizations (φ_{B}, ρ_{B}, σ_{B}) ↦ (φ, ρ, σ) such that for any prescribed bare generating coupling functional h_{B}(·) there exists a renormalized h(·) such that
Both coupling functionals are related by
The H_{l}[h] are explicitly known functionals of the renormalized h (see Equation (3.70) below). The nonlinear field renormalizations are likewise explicitly known and given in Equations (3.65, 3.70).
A subscript ‘_{B}’ denotes the bare fields while the plain symbols refer to the renormalized ones and similarly for h. Notably no higher order derivative terms are enforced by the renormalization process; strict cutoff independence can be achieved without them. However the fact that h_{B}(·) and h(·) differ marks the deviation from conventional renormalizability. The prefactor h(ρ)/ρ also has a physical interpretation: To lowest order it is for pure gravity the conformal factor in a Weyl transformation g_{αβ}(x) → e^{ω(ρ(x))} g_{αβ}(x) a generic fourdimensional metric g_{αβ}(x) with two Killing vectors in adapted coordinates.
The derivation of this result is based on a reformulation of the class of QFTs based on Equation (3.56) as a Riemannian sigmamodel in the sense of Friedan [84]. This is a class of twodimensional QFTs which is also (perturbatively) renormalizable only in a generalized sense, namely by allowing for infinitely many relevant couplings. The generating functional for these couplings in this case is a (pseudo)Riemannian metric ɧ on a “target manifold \({\mathcal M}\)” of arbitrary dimension D and field coordinates \(\phi :\Sigma \rightarrow {\mathcal M}\), where Σ is the twodimensional “base manifold”. The renormalization theory of these systems is well understood. A brief summary of the results relevant here is given in Appendix B.3.
The systems (3.56) can be interpreted as Riemannian sigma models where the target manifold of a special class of “warped products” (see Equation (3.59) below) and the fields are ϕ = (φ, ρ, σ). The relation between the quantum theory of these Riemannian sigmamodels and the QFT based on Equation (3.56) will roughly be that one performs an infinite reduction of couplings in a sense similar to [236, 160, 174]. The generating functional ɧ_{ij}(ϕ) is parameterized by \({{D\left({D  1} \right)} \over 2}\) functions of D variables, while the generating functional h in Equation (3.56) amounts to one function of one variable. Thus “\({{D\left({D  1} \right)} \over 2} \times D \times \infty\)” many couplings are reduced to “1 × ∞” many couplings. As always in a reduction of couplings the nontrivial point is that this reduction can be done in a way compatible with the RG dynamics. The original construction in [236, 160] was in the context of strictly renormalizable QFTs with a finite number of relevant couplings. In a QFT with infinitely many relevant couplings (QCD in a lightfront formulation) the reduction principle was used by PerryWilson [174]. A general study of an ‘infinite reduction’ of couplings has been performed in [11].
The reduction technique used here is different, but essentially Equation (3.68) below plays the role of the reduction equation. Apart from the different derivation and the fact that the reduction is performed on the level of generating functionals, the main difference to a usual reduction is that Equation (3.68) also involves nonlinear field redefinitions without which the reduction could not be achieved here. The reduction equation (3.68) thus mixes field redefinitions and couplings. From the viewpoint of Riemannian sigmamodels this amounts to the use of metric dependent diffeomorphisms on the target manifold, a concept neither needed nor used in the context of Riemannian sigmamodels otherwise.
Since Riemannian sigmamodels have been widely used in the context of “strings in curved spacetimes” it may be worthwhile to point out the differences to their use here:

1.
First, the scalar fields (Δ, ψ, ρ, σ) in Equation (3.56) parameterize a 4D spacetime metric with 2 Killing vectors (not the position of a string in target space) while the target space metric ɧ here (see Equation (3.60) below) has 4 Killing vectors. It is auxiliary and not interpreted as a physical spacetime metric. From the viewpoint of “strings in curved spacetime” the system (3.56) (without matter), on the other hand, describes strings moving on a spacetime with 4 Killing vectors and signature (+, +, +, −).

2.
The aim in the renormalization process here is to preserve the conformal geometry in target space, not conformal invariance on the worldsheet (base space) Σ. To achieve this one needs metric dependent diffeomorphisms in target space which, as mentioned before, neither need to be nor have been considered before in the context of Riemannian sigmamodels.

3.
As a consequence of Difference 2 the renormalized fields ρ and σ become scale dependent and their renormalization flow backreacts on the coupling flow (see Equations (3.75, 3.84) below). This aspect is absent if one naively specializes the renormalization theory of a generic Riemannian sigmamodel to a target space geometry which is a warped product (see [221]).

4.
As will become clear later in the class of warped product sigmamodels considered here the Weyl anomaly is overdetermined at the fixed point of the coupling flow. In contrast to a generic Riemannian sigmamodel one is therefore not free to adjust the renormalized target space metric ɧ_{ij}(ϕ) such that the Weyl anomaly vanishes and the system is a conformally invariant 2D field theory.

5.
The renormalization flow in Riemannian sigmamodels is of the form \(\mu {d \over {d\mu}}\mathfrak{h}_{ij}=\beta_{ij}\left(\mathfrak{h}\right)\), where ɧ is the renormalized generating coupling functional (“target space metric”) with the renormalized quantum fields ϕ inserted. Conceptually the highly nonlinear but local β_{ij}(ɧ) on the righthandside thus is a (very special) composite operator, whose finiteness is guaranteed by the construction (see Section B.3). The fact that this very special composite operator is finite does of course not entail that any other nonlinear composite operator built from ϕ or ɧ_{ij}(ϕ) is finite (without introducing additional counterterms). For example ϕ^{2} or a curvature combination of ɧ_{ij}(ϕ) not occuring in β_{ij}(ɧ) is simply not defined offhand. This is true no matter how ϕ ↦ ɧ_{ij}(ϕ) is chosen, so the folklore that one can restrict attention to functionals ɧ for which the trace or Weyl anomaly vanishes and get a “finite” QFT is incorrect (see [201] for a discussion). Moreover the Weyl anomaly is itself a (very special) composite operator and the condition for its vanishing is not equivalent to a partial differential equation of the same form for any classical metric. By expanding the quantum fields ϕ around a classical background configuration one can convert the condition for a vanishing Weyl anomaly into a condition formulated in terms of a classical metric [220]. However beyond lowest order (that is, beyond the Ricci term) nonlocal terms are generated, and the resulting cumbersome equations are rarely used. As a consequence beyond leading order (beyond Ricci flatness modulo an improvement term) most of the “consistent string backgrounds” (defined by adhoc replacing the composite operator ɧ(ϕ) by a classical metric in the formula for the Weyl anomaly as a composite operator) are actually not consistent, in the sense that the corresponding metric reinterpreted (adhoc) as one with the quantum fields reinserted does not guarantee the vanishing of the Weyl anomaly in its operator form.

6.
Even the Ricci flow equations arising at lowest order have the property that for a generic smooth target space metric the flow is often singular towards the ultraviolet [52]. For generic target spaces the Riemannian sigmamodels are therefore unlikely to give rise to genuine (not merely effective) quantum field theories.
The situation changes drastically if one considers Riemannian sigmamodels where the target manifold is one the warped products (3.59) below. The Problem 5 is absent on the basis of the following Nonrenormalization Lemma, the Problem 6 is evaded because the Riccitype flow arising at first order is constant [61] while to higher orders the asymptotic safety property to be described strikes:
Nonrenormalization Lemma [154]:
The field ρ is nonlinearly renormalized but once it is renormalized arbitrary powers thereof (defined by multiplication pointwise on the base manifold) are automatically finite, without the need of additional counterterms. In terms of the normal product defined in Appendix B.3. [F(ρ)] = μ^{d−2}F(ρ) for an arbitary (analytic) function F.
Needless to say that the same is not true for σ or any other of the quantum fields φ^{i}. As a consequence of this Nonrenormalization Lemma the renormalization flow equations for the generating functional h (the counterpart of ɧ) can be consistently interpreted as an equation for a classical field, which we also denote by ρ since the quantum field can be manipulated as if it was a classical field. The resulting flow equations then take the form of a recursive system of nonlinear partial integrodifferential equations, which are studied in Section 3.4.
We now describe the derivation of these results in outline; the full details can be found in [154, 155]. The class of warped product target manifolds relevant for Equation (3.56) is of the form
where m is the metric (3.11) on the symmetric space G/H, h = h(ρ) is the ‘warp factor’, and \({\mathcal R}\) is a flat twodimensional space with Lorentzian metric given by the lower 2 × 2 block in the metric
If ζ_{1} is the scalar curvature of the G/H normalized as in Equation (3.12) the metric (3.60) has scalar curvature
so that the warp function parameterizes the inverse curvature radius of the target space.
Here we combined the field vector (3.9) with ϕ^{n+1} ≔ σ to a \(D = 2 + \bar n + 2k + 2\)dimensional vector ϕ = (φ^{1},…, φ^{n}, ρ, σ), and the metric (3.60) refer to this coordinate system. Further a, b are real parameters kept mainly to illustrate that they drop out in the quantities of interest. The metric is chosen such that for the parameter values a = −1, b = −1 the Lagrangian (3.56) can be written in the form
In addition to the Killing vectors associated with m the metric (3.60) possesses two conformal Killing vectors \({{\bf{t}}_ +} = \rho {\partial _\rho}  {a \over {2b}}{\partial _\sigma}\) and \({\bf{d}} =  \rho \,\ln \,\rho {\partial _\rho} + \left({\sigma + {a \over b}\ln \,\rho} \right){\partial _\sigma}\), which together with t_{−} = ∂_{σ} generate the isometries of ℝ^{1,1}, i.e. [t_{+}, t_{−}] = 0, [d, t_{±}] = ±t_{±}. Conversely any metric with these conformal isometries can be brought into the above form. Each Killing vector of ɧ of course gives rise to a Noether current; the conformal Killing vectors t_{+} and d give rise to currents analogous to those in Equation (3.27). The counterpart of onshell the relations (3.27) is ∂^{μ}C_{μ} = ρ∂_{ρ} ln h · L, ∂^{μ}D_{μ} = −ln ρ ρ∂_{ρ} ln h · L. Upon quantization Λ in Equation (3.62) plays the role of the loop counting parameter. In dimensional regularization (∫ d^{2}x → ∫ d^{d}x) the lloop counter terms contain poles of order v ≤ l in (2 − d). We denote the coefficient of the vth order pole by \(T_{ij}^{\left({\nu, \, l} \right)}\left(\mathfrak{h} \right)\). In principle the higher order pole terms are determined recursively by the residues \(T_{ij}^{\left({1, \, l} \right)}\left(\mathfrak{h} \right)\) of the first order poles. Taking the consistency of the cancellations for granted one can focus on the residues of the first oder poles, which we shall do throughout. One can show [154] that they have the following structure:
It should be stressed that this is not trivially a consequence of the blockdiagonal form of Equation (3.60), rather the properties (3.12) enter in an essential way.
The ζ_{l} are constants defined through the curvature scalars of m_{ij}. The S_{l}(ρ) are differential polynomials in h invariant under constant rescalings of h and normalized to vanish for constant h. The first three are
The counter terms (3.63) ought to be absorbed by nonlinear field renormalizations,
and a renormalization of the function h,
where μ is the renormalization scale. Note that on both sides of Equation (3.66) the argument is the renormalized field. The renormalized h function is allowed to depend on Λ; specifically we assume it to have the form
where the first term ensures standard renormalizability at the 1loop level — and is determined by this requirement except for the power p ≠ 0. The power has no intrinsic significance; one could have chosen a parameterization of the 4D spacetime metric g_{αβ} such that the action (3.10) with ρ replaced by ρ^{p} was the outcome of the classical reduction procedure. In particular the sectors p > 0 and p < 0 are equivalent and we assume p > 0 throughout.
Combining Equations (3.60, 3.65, 3.66) and (3.63) one finds that the first order poles cancel in the renormalized Lagrangian iff the following “reduction condition” holds:
where \({T^{\left(1 \right)}}\left(\mathfrak{h} \right) = \sum\nolimits_{l \geq 1} {{{\left({{1 \over {2\pi}}} \right)}^l}{T^{\left({1,\,l} \right)}}} \left(\mathfrak{h} \right)\) and \({{\mathcal L}_\Xi}\mathfrak{h}\) is the Lie derivative of ɧ, \(\mathfrak{h},{{\mathcal L}_\Xi}{\mathfrak{h}_{ij}}: = {\left({{{\mathcal L}_\Xi}\mathfrak{h}} \right)_{ij}} = {\Xi ^k}{\partial _k}{\mathfrak{h}_{ij}} + {\partial _i}{\Xi ^k}{\mathfrak{h}_{kj}} + {\partial _j}{\Xi ^k}{\mathfrak{h}_{ki}}\). The ρdependence of H marks the deviation from conventional renormalizability. Guided by the structure of Equations (3.60) and (3.63) we search for a solution with \({\Xi ^j} = \left({0,\, \ldots, \,0,\,{\Xi ^\rho}\left({\rho, \,\lambda} \right),\,{\Xi ^\sigma}\left({\rho, \,\lambda} \right)} \right)\), where here and later on we also use ρ = n +1, σ = n + 2 for the index labeling. The Lie derivative term with this Ξ^{j} is
The reduction condition (3.68) then is equivalent to a simple system of differential equations whose solution is
Here we set
and slightly adjusted the notation to stress the functional dependence on h/Λ. Possibly Λdependent integration constants have been absorbed into the lower integration boundaries of the integrals. Throughout these solutions should be read as shorthands for their series expansions in Λ with h of the form (3.67). For example
For the derivation of Equations (3.68, 3.70) we fixed a coordinate system in which the target space metric takes the form (3.60). Under a change of parameterization \({\phi ^j} \rightarrow {\phi ^j}\left({\hat \phi} \right)\) the reduction condition (3.68) should transform covariantly, and indeed it does. The constituents transform as
The covariance of the counter terms as a function of the full field is nontrivial [110, 41] and is one of the main advantages of the covariant background field expansion. The relations (3.73) can be used to convert the solutions (3.70) of the finiteness condition into any desired coordinate system on the target space. The coordinates σ and ρ used in Equation (3.60) are adapted to the Killing vector t_{−} and the conformal Killing vectors t_{+}, d.
This completes the renormalization of the Lagrangian L_{h}. The nonlinear field redefinitions alluded to in Equation (3.57) are explicitly given by Equation (3.70). The function ρ → h(ρ) plays the role of a generating function of an infinite set of essential couplings. In principle it could be expanded with respect to a basis of μindependent functions of ρ with μdependent coefficients, the couplings. Technically the fact that these couplings are essential (in sense defined in the introduction) follows from Equations (3.27). Since ρ is a nontrivial function on the base manifold, the Lagrangian is a total divergence on shell if and only if h(ρ) = ρ^{p}, or h(ρ) = ln ρ^{p}. The first case corresponds to the classical Lagrangian (3.16), the second case was studied (in a different context) by Tseytlin [221]. In the case h(ρ) = ρ^{p} the identity pL = ∂^{μ}C_{μ} reflects the fact that the overall scale of the metric is an inessential parameter (see Appendix A). The renormalization flow associated with the coupling functional h will be studied in the next Section 3.4.
The fields themselves, here to be viewed as a collection of inessential parameters, are likewise subject to flow equations. Recall from Equation (3.65) the relation between the bare and the renormalized fields, where Ξ^{1} = ⋯ = Ξ^{n} = 0, while Ξ^{ρ}, Ξ^{σ} have been computed in Equation (3.70) and depend on h. Since the bare fields are μindependent, the renormalized fields ϕ^{j} have to carry an implicit μdependence through h. (This is analogous to the situation in an ordinary multiplicatively renormalizable quantum field theory, where the coupling dependence of the wave function renormalization induces a compensating μdependence of the renormalized fields governed by the anomalous dimension function.) The flow equations involve functional derivatives with respect to the h field. For any functional X(ρ) = X[h](ρ) of h(ρ) we set
Observe that for any differential or integral polynomial X_{l} in h which is homogeneous of degree l, the functional derivative (3.74) just measures the degree, Ẋ_{l} = lX_{l}. From Equations (3.65, 3.70) and the \(\bar h\)flow (3.83) below one derives
where Ξ^{ρ}[h], Ξ^{σ}[h] refer to Equation (3.76) with the solution of Equation (3.83) inserted for h. Note that, conceptually, the problems decouple: One first solves the autonomous equation (3.83) to obtain the coupling flow \(\mu \rightarrow \bar h\left({\cdot, \,\mu} \right)\) which is then used to specify the righthandside of the \(\bar \rho\)flow equation whose solution in turn determines the \(\bar \sigma\)flow. The ‘·’ derivatives of the solution (3.70) of the reduction condition come out as
In \({\dot \Xi ^\rho}\) we set \({\beta _{G/H}}\left(\lambda \right): =  \lambda \sum\nolimits_{l \geq 1} {l{\zeta _l}{{\left({{\lambda \over {2\pi}}} \right)}^l}}\) and anticipated in the notation that this is the conventional beta functions of a G/H coset sigmamodel without coupling to gravity. In \({\dot \Xi ^\sigma}\) we absorbed a Λdependent additive constant into the lower integration boundary and used \(\dot S\left({\rho, \,\lambda} \right) =  {\sum\nolimits_{l \geq 1} {\left({{\lambda \over {2\pi}}} \right)} ^l}l{h^{ l}}{S_l}\left(\rho \right)\), as Ṡ_{l}(ρ) = 0.
We proceed with the renormalization of composite operators. Again we borrow techniques from Riemannian sigma models (see Appendix B.3). The normal product of scalar, vector, and tensor operators on the target manifold is defined in Equation (B.70). For generic composite operators of course the bare operator viewed as a function of the bare couplings and of the bare fields will have a different functional form from the renormalized one viewed as a function of the renormalized couplings and fields. An important exception was already described in the above ‘Nonrenormalization Lemma’ for functions of ρ only. This is specific to the system here. Another class of operators for which similar nonrenormalization results hold are conserved Noether currents; this is a feature true in general. In the case at hand the relevant Noether currents are Equation (3.26), the current \({R_\mu} = {b \over \lambda}h{\partial _\mu}\ln \,\rho\), and the “wouldbe” energy momentum tensor T_{μν}. In terms of the normal product (B.70) the corresponding nonrenormalization results read [154]
For the current R_{μ} the identity 〚R_{μ}(h; ρ)〛 = μ^{d−2}R_{μ}(h_{B}; ρ_{B}) follows similarly on general grounds, while the stronger identity
is a consequence of the nonrenormalization Lemma. The result (3.78) will later turn out to reflect a property of the generalized beta function. For the renormalization of constraints in Equation (3.15) improvement terms are crucial. As in Equation (3.15) we wish to identify the constraints \({{\mathcal H}_0}\) and \({{\mathcal H}_1}\) with the components of the “would be” energy momentum tensor associated with the ‘deformed’ Lagrangian L_{h}. To this end we decompose the energy momentum tensor for the Lagrangian L_{h} into a symmetric tracefree part t_{μν} and an improvement term
with Δ_{μν} = ∂_{μ}∂_{ν} − η_{μν}∂^{2}. The improvement term Δ_{μν}f is trivially conserved but its trace η^{μν} Δ_{μν}f = −d^{2} f vanishes only onshell. In contrast to t_{μν} its functional form is not protected by the conservation equation, and for the finiteness of the composite operator 〚T_{μν}(h; ϕ)〛 the improvement potential f(ρ) has to be renormalized in a way that changes its functional form. This is to say, there is no function f(·, Λ) such that the bare and the renormalized improvement potential would merely be related by substituting the bare field ρ_{B} and the renormalized one ρ, respectively, into f(·, Λ). Rather we set V_{B} = f_{B}(ρ_{B}) + μ^{d−2}f_{0}σ_{B} and V = f(ρ) + f_{0}σ, where f_{0} is a potentially Λdependent constant, f_{B} is a function of the bare field ρ_{B} and Λ, and f is a function of the renormalized field ρ and λ. The finiteness of 〚T_{μν}(h; ϕ)〛 can then be achieved by relating f_{B} and f (the functions, not their values) according to
Here k(ρ) is a differential polynomial in h(ρ) that can be computed from the counterterms in Equation (B.61) of Appendix B.3. Note that as in Equation (3.66) the argument on both sides is the renormalized ρ field. Starting from the fact that the righthandside of Equation (3.80) is μindependent one can derive an nonautonomous flow equation [155]
where K[h] is determined by k[h]. For a given solution \(\bar h\) the flow equation (3.81) in principle determines \(\bar f = \bar f\left[ {\bar h} \right]\left({\rho, \, \mu} \right)\). Finally
can be shown to be a finite composite operator. Upon specification of initial data for \(h\left(\rho \right) = \bar h\left({\rho, \, {\mu _0}} \right)\) and \(f\left(\rho \right) = \bar f\left({\rho, \,{\mu _0}} \right)\) satisfying the proper boundary or falloff conditions in ρ, the composite operator 〚T_{μν}(h; φ)〛 is completely determined. This holds for an arbitrary coupling function h. In general the operator 〚T_{μν}(h; φ)〛 will not be trace free. The interpretation of the components of 〚T_{μν}〛 as quantum constraints, on the other hand, requires that the trace vanishes as \([\![{\mathcal H}_0]\!]\) should be equal to both 〚T_{00}〛 and 〚T_{11}〛. We shall return to this condition below (see Equations (3.100), etc.).
3.4 NonGaussian fixed point and asymptotic safety
As explained before the function h plays the role of a generating functional for an infinite set of essential couplings. As such it is subject to a flow equation
where μ is the renormalization scale and \(\mu \rightarrow \bar h\left({\cdot, \,\mu} \right)\) is the ‘running’ coupling function. The flow equation can be obtained by the usual procedure starting from the fact that the lefthandside of Equation (3.58) is μindependent. One finds [154]
where we suppress the Λ dependence of h. Inserting Equation (3.69) and setting d = 2 in the result gives
Here \({\beta _{G/H}}\left(\lambda \right) =  \lambda {\sum\nolimits_{l \geq 1} {l{\zeta _l}\left({{\lambda \over {2\pi}}} \right)} ^l}\) is again the conventional (numerical) beta function of the G/H nonlinear sigmamodel without coupling to gravity, computed in the minimal subtraction scheme. β_{h}(h) can thus be regarded as a “gravitationally dressed” version of β_{G/H}(Λ). The term is borrowed from [120] where a similar phenomenon was found in a different context and to lowest order. In contrast to Equation (3.85) the effect of quantum gravity on the running of the couplings in these Liouvilletype theories cannot be represented as a simple “dressing relation” beyond lowest order [168]. The flow equation resulting from Equation (3.85) will be studied in more detail below. We anticipate however that the appropriate boundary conditions are such that the solution \(\bar h\left({\rho, \,\lambda} \right)\) is stationary (constant in μ) for ρ →∞. This guarantees that the renormalization flow is exclusively driven by the counterterms, as it should. We add some comments on the structure of the beta function (3.85).
An initially puzzling feature of β_{h}(h) is that it comes out as a total ln ρderivative. Restoring the interpretation of ρ = ρ(x) as a field on the 2D base space, however, it has a natural interpretation: An immediate consequence of Equations (3.83, 3.85) is that contour integrals of the form
are μindependent for any closed contour C in the base space, as can be seen by differentiating Equation (3.86) with respect to μ. They are thus invariants of the flow and can be used to discriminate the inequivalent quantum theories parameterized by the h_{l}(ρ). With the initial condition \(\bar h\left({\rho, \,{\mu _0}} \right) = h\left(\rho \right)\) the μindependence of Equation (3.86) is equivalent to \({\partial ^\mu}\left[ {\left({\bar h  h} \right){\partial _\mu}\ln \,\rho} \right] = 0\). On the other hand the (classical and quantum) equations of motion for ρ with respect to the hmodified action are just ∂^{μ}(h∂_{μ} ln ρ) = 0. Combining both we find that the significance of β_{h}(h) being a total ln ρderivative is that this feature preserves the equations of motion for ρ under the μevolution of \(\bar h\left({\cdot, \,\mu} \right)\):
This provides an important consistency check as Equation (3.87) is also required by the nonrenormalization of the R_{μ} Noether current in Equation (3.78).
Another intriguing property of Equation (3.85) can be seen from the second line in Equation (3.84). The first two terms correspond to the beta function of a G/H sigmamodel without coupling to 2D gravity (i.e. with nondynamical ρ and σ). The last term is crucial for all the subsequent properties of the flow (3.83). Comparing with Equation (3.75) one sees that it describes a backreaction of the scale dependent area radius ρ on the coupling flow, which is mediated by the quantum dynamics of the other fields. We shall return to this point below.
As usual fixed points of the flow correspond to zeros of the generalized beta function. The flow has two fixed points, a degenerate Gaussian one corresponding to h = ∞ formally, and a nonGaussian fixed point h^{beta}(·) which is of main interest here. We postpone the discussion of the Gaussian fixed point and focus on the nonGaussian one here. The defining relation for such a nontrivial fixed point amounts by Equation (3.85) to the differential equation
where C(Λ) is a constant, which in principle could be Λdependent. The Equation (3.88) is to be interpreted with Equation (3.67) inserted and expanded in powers of Λ. This can be solved recursively for h_{1}, h_{2}, etc. We denote the solutions by \(h_l^{{\rm{beta}}}\left(\rho \right)\). The unique solution adhering to the above boundary condition corresponds to a Λindependent C, for which we write p/ζ_{1}, where ζ_{1} is the first beta function coefficient. The solution then reads
This is a nontrivial fixed point, in the sense that gravity remains selfinteracting and coupled to matter.
The renormalized action (at or away from the fixed point) has no direct significance in the quantum theory. It is however instructive to note that L_{h} in Equation (3.56) can for any h(ρ) = ρ^{p} not be written in the form \({L_{EH}}\left(g \right) = \sqrt { g} R\left(g \right)\) for any metric with two commuting Killing vectors. In accordance with the general renormalization group picture one can of course write L_{h} ∼ L_{EH}(g) + L_{other}(g). Interestingly, in the 2Killing vector reduction one can write the renormalized Lagrangian L_{h} as a sum of two terms which are reductions of L_{EH}. Since the parameter α in L_{h} can be changed at will by redefining \(\sigma \mapsto \sigma + {{a  \tilde a} \over {2b}}{\rho ^{ 1}}\), we may assume that b = −p, a = −3p^{2} + 2p, for some p ≠ 0. Then
modulo total derivatives, where in the first term g is the metric with line element (3.8) and g_{0} is a metric with line element
The extra term \({L_{EH}}\left({{g_0}} \right) = {1 \over 2}\left({\rho {\partial _\rho}h  ph} \right)\left[ {\left({3p  2 + 3\rho {\partial _\rho}\ln \,h} \right){\rho ^{ 2}}{\partial ^\mu}\rho {\partial _\mu}\rho + 2{\rho ^{ 1}}{\partial ^\mu}\rho {\partial _\mu}\sigma} \right]\) involves only the area radius ρ and the conformal factor σ. It vanishes iff h(ρ) is proportional to ρ^{p}. From Equation (3.89) one sees that h^{beta}(ρ) = ρ^{p} always; by construction in the minimal subtraction scheme, but since the coefficients ζ_{1}, ζ_{2} are universal, the same holds in any other scheme.
The origin of this feature is the seeming violation of scale invariance on the level of the renormalized action. Recall from after Equation (3.62) that ∂^{μ}C_{μ} = ρ∂_{ρ} ln h · L_{h}, so that for h^{beta}(ρ) ≠ ρ^{p} the action is no longer scale invariant. However this is precisely the property which allows one to cancel the (otherwise) anomalous term in the trace of the wouldbe energy momentum tensor, as discussed before, rendering the system conformally invariant at the fixed point. Due to the lack of naive scale invariance on the level of the renormalized action the dynamics of quantum gravidynamics is different from that of quantum general relativity, in the sector considered, even at the fixed point. The moral presumably generalizes: The form of the (bare and/or renormalized) action may have to differ from the EinsteinHilbert action in order to incorporate the physics properties aimed at.
In the present context the most important feature of the fixed point h^{beta} is its ultraviolet stability: For μ → ∞ all linearized perturbations around the fixed point function (3.89) are driven back to the fixed point. Since the fixed point (3.89) has the form of a power series in the loop counting parameter Λ, the proper concept of a “linearized perturbation” has the form
where the \({\bar s_l}({\varrho, \,t})\) are functions of ϱ ≔ ϱ^{p} and \(t = {1 \over {2\pi}}\ln \,\mu/{\mu _0}\). Note that the perturbation involves infinitely many functions of two variables. The boundary condition mentioned before, which guarantees that the full \(\bar h\) flow is driven by the counterterms, only amounts to the requirement that all the \({\bar s_l}({\varrho, \,t})\) vanish for ϱ → ∞ uniformly in t. Inserting the ansatz (3.92) into the flow equation \(\mu {d \over {d\mu}}\bar h = {\beta _h}\left({\bar h/\lambda} \right)\) and linearizing in \(\overline {\delta h} \left({\rho, \,\lambda, \,\mu} \right)\) gives a recursive system of inhomogeneous integrodifferential equations for the \({\bar s_l}\),
Here R_{1} = 0, while the R_{l}, l ≥ 2, are complicated integrodifferential operators acting (linearly) on the \({\bar s_1},\, \ldots \,,\,{\bar s_{l  1}}\) (see [155] for the explicit expressions). The lowest order equation (3.93) is homogeneous and its solution is given by
where r_{1} is an arbitrary smooth function of one variable satisfying u r_{1}(u) → 0 for u → 0. This function can essentially be identified with the initial datum at some renormalization time t = 0, as \({r_1}(\varrho) =  \varrho {\partial _\varrho}[ {{{\bar s}_1}({\varrho, \,t = 0})/\varrho}]\). Evidently \({\bar s_1}({\varrho, \,t}) \rightarrow 0\) for t → ∞, if ζ_{1} < 0. This condition is indeed satisfied by all the systems (3.1, 3.56) considered, precisely because the coset space G/H is noncompact. Interestingly one has the simple formula [155]
It follows from the value of the quadratic Casimir in the appropriate representation and is consistent with [47]. Since ζ_{1} < 0 always, Equation (3.94) shows that the lowest order perturbation \({\bar s_1}\) will always die out for t → ∞, for arbitrary smooth initial data prescribed at t = 0. It can be shown that this continues to hold for all higher order \({\bar s_l}\) irrespective of the signs of the coefficients ζ_{l}, l ≥ 2.
Result (UV stability):
Given smooth initial \({\bar s_l}({\varrho, \,0})\) with \({\bar s_l}({\infty, \,t}) = 0,\,\,l \geq 1\), l ≥ 1, the solution of the linearized flow equations (3.93) is unique and satisfies
where the convergence is uniform in ϱ.
The situation is illustrated in Figure 1. The proof of this result is somewhat technical and can be found in [155].
Often the stability properties of fixed points are not discussed by solving the linear flow equations directly, but by studying the spectral properties of the linearized perturbation operator (the “stability matrix” in Equation (A.10)). Since the generalized couplings here are functions, the linearized perturbation operator Θ is a formal integral operator,
with a distributional kernel \(\Theta \left({\varrho, \,u} \right) = \sum\nolimits_l {{{\left({{\lambda \over {2\pi}}} \right)}^{l  1}}{\Theta _l}} \left({\varrho, \,u} \right)\), which can be computed from the explicit formula (3.85). For example
where θ(u) is the step function. Writing \(s\left(\varrho \right) = \sum\nolimits_{l \geq 1} {{{\left({{\lambda \over {2\pi}}} \right)}^{l  1}}{s_l}\left(\varrho \right)}, \,\vartheta = {\sum\nolimits_{l \geq 1} {\left({{\lambda \over {2\pi}}} \right)} ^{l  1}}{\vartheta _l},\,\vartheta \in \mathbb{C}\), the spectral problem Θs = ϑs decomposes into a sequence of integrodifferential equations for the Θ_{1}s_{l} − ϑ_{1}s_{l} = rhs, where the righthandside is determined by the solution of the lower order equations. Only the l = 1 equation is a spectral problem proper, Θ_{1}s_{1} = ϑ_{1}s_{1}, ϑ_{1} ∈ ℂ. The relevant and irrelevant perturbations have spectra with negative and positive real parts, respectively. Remarkably all (nontrivial) eigenfunctions of Θ_{1} are normalizable; the spectrum is “purely discrete” and consists of the entire halfplane {ϑ_{1} ∈ ℂ ∣ Re ϑ_{1} < 0}. Indeed, the general solution to Θ_{1}s_{1} = ϑ_{1}s_{1} is \({s_1}\left(\varrho \right) = a\varrho + b\varrho \int\nolimits_\varrho ^\infty {{{du} \over u}} {e^{ {\vartheta _1}u/{\zeta _1}}}\), with a, b ∈ ℂ. The first term merely corresponds to a change of normalization of h^{beta}(ϱ) = ϱ + O(λ) and we may set a = 0, b = 1 without loss of generality. The second term corresponds to Equation (3.94) with \({r_1}\left(u \right) = {e^{ {\vartheta _1}u/{\zeta _1}}}\). This clearly confirms the above result from a different perspective. For l > 1 the parameters ϑ_{1} are not spectral values for Θ_{l}. Moreover, since the kernels Θ_{l} are distributions it is not quite clear which precise functional analytic setting one should choose for the full spectral problem Θs = ϑs. This is why above we adopted the direct strategy and determined the solutions of the linearized flow equations. Their asymptotic decay shows the ultraviolet stability of the fixed point unambiguously and independent of functional analytical subtleties.
We can put this result into the context the general discussion in Section 2 and arrive at the following conclusion:
3.5 Conclusion
With respect to the nonGaussian fixed point h^{beta}(·) all couplings in the generating functional h(·) are asymptotically safe. All symmetry reduced gravity systems satisfy the Criteria (PTC1) and (PTC2) to all loop orders of sigmamodel perturbation theory. As explained in Section 3.2 from the viewpoint of the graviton loop expansion the distinction between a perturbative and a nonperturbative treatment is blurred here.
It is instructive to compare these properties to that of the Gaussian fixed point. The Gaussian fixed point of the flow (3.83) is best understood in analogy to the Gaussian fixedpoint of a conventional nonlinear sigmamodel. For a G/H nonlinear sigmamodel with Lagrangian \(L =  {1 \over {2{\rm{g}_0}}}{\mathfrak{m}_{ij}}\left(\varphi \right){\partial ^\mu}{\varphi ^i}{\partial _\mu}{\varphi ^j}\) (with m satisfying Equation (3.12)) the beta function \({\beta _{G/H}}\left({{\rm{g}_0}} \right) = {\rm{g}_0}\sum\nolimits_{l \leq 1} {l{\zeta _l}} {\left({{{{\rm{g}_0}} \over {2\pi}}} \right)^l}\) has only the trivial zero \(\rm{g}_0^{\ast} = 0\). As g_{0} → 0 the renormalized Lagrangian blows up, but in an expansion around m_{ij}(φ) = δ_{ij} one can see that for g_{0} → 0 the interaction terms vanish. In this sense the fixed point \(\rm{g}_0^{\ast} = 0\) is Gaussian. This holds irrespective of the sign of ζ_{1}, which however determines the stability properties of the flow. The stability ‘matrix’ vanishes so that the linearized stability analysis is empty. By direct inspection of the differential equation one sees that the unstable manifold of \(\rm{g}_0^{\ast}\) is onedimensional for ζ_{1} > 0 (typical for G/H compact) and empty for ζ_{1} < 0 (typical for G/H noncompact). Indeed, \( \mu {d \over {d\mu}}{{\rm{\bar g}}_0} = {{{\zeta _1}} \over {2\pi}}{\rm{\bar g}}_0^2 + O\left({{\rm{\bar g}}_0^3} \right)\), and if one insists on ḡ_{0} ≥ 0 for positivityofenergy reasons, the flow will be attracted to \(\rm{g}_0^{\ast} = 0\) for μ → ∞ iff ζ_{1} > 0. In particular for ζ_{1} < 0 these models are, based on the Criterion (PTC2) of Section 2, not expected to have a genuine continuum limit.
The Gaussian fixed point of the symmetry reduced gravity theories can be analyzed similarly. In terms of
the flow equation (3.83) reads
Clearly g_{*}(ρ) ≡ 0 is a fixed point (function) and in a similar sense as before it can be interpreted as a Gaussian fixed point. In contrast to the nonGaussian fixed point the linearized stability analysis is now empty (just as it is for the G/H sigmamodel flow). One thus has to cope with the nonlinear flow equation (3.99) at least to quadratic order. This is cumbersome but the qualitative feature of interest here can readily be understood: With respect to the Gaussian fixed point g_{*}(ρ) ≡ 0 not all couplings contained in the generating functional g(·) are asymptotically safe. That is, there exists initial data g_{0}(ρ) = ḡ_{0}(ρ, μ_{0}) (with g_{0}(ρ) → 0, for ρ → ∞) for which the μ → ∞ asymptotics does not vanish identically in ρ. To see this, it suffices to note that the righthandside of Equation (3.99) to quadratic order reads ζ_{1}ḡ^{2} ρ∂_{ρ}I(ḡ), with \(I\left({\rm{g}} \right): = {{\rm{g}}^{ 1}}\int\nolimits_\rho ^\infty {{{du} \over u}{\rm{g}}\left(u \right)}\). Since ζ_{1} < 0 always, initial data g_{0} for which I(g_{0}) is a strictly increasing function of ρ will give rise to solutions having the tendency to be driven towards larger values (pointwise in ρ) as μ increases. Conversely, only initial data g_{0} for which I(g_{0}) is strictly decreasing in ρ can be expected to give rise to a solution g_{0} which vanishes identically in ρ as μ → ∞. A rigorous theorem describing the stable and the unstable manifold is presumably hard to come by, but for our purposes it is enough to know that there exist initial data which do not give rise to solutions decaying to g_{*}(ρ) ≡ 0 for μ → ∞. For example g_{0}(ρ) = ρe^{−aρ} or \({\rm{g}_0}\left(\rho \right) = \exp \left({ \sqrt {a + b\ln \,\rho}} \right),\,a,\,b > 0\), have this property. The upshot is that the Gaussian fixed point of the symmetry truncated gravity theories is not UV stable, the Condition (PTC2) is not satisfied, and one can presumably not use it for the construction of a genuine continuum limit.
At this point it may be instructive to contrast the quantum properties of the dimensionally reduced gravity theories with those of the same noncompact G/H sigmamodel without coupling to gravity (which effectively amounts to setting ρ constant in Equation (3.16)). The qualitative differences are summarized in Table 2.
The comparison highlights why the above conclusion is surprising and significant. While the noncompact G/H sigmamodels are renormalizable with just one relevant coupling (denoted by g in the table), at least in the known constructions they do not have a fixed point at which they are conformally invariant. Their gravitational counterparts require infinitely many relevant couplings for their UV renormalization. This infinite coupling flow has a nontrivial UV fixed point at which the theory is conformally invariant. Most importantly the stability properties of the renormalization flow are reversed (compared to the flow of g) for all of the infinitely many relevant couplings. As there appears to be no structural reason for this surprising reversal in the reduced theory itself, we regard it as strong evidence for the existence of an UV stable fixed point for the full renormalization group dynamics.
In the table we anticipated that at the fixed point the trace anomaly of the wouldbe energy momentum tensor vanishes for the symmetry truncated gravity theories. This allows one to construct quantum counterparts of the constraints \({{\mathcal H}_0}\) and \({{\mathcal H}_1}\) as welldefined composite operators. In detail this comes about as follows. Taking the trace in Equation (3.81) gives \([\![{T^\mu}_\mu \left({h;\,\phi} \right)]\!] = [\![{t^\mu}_\mu \left({h;\,\phi} \right)]\!]  {\partial ^2}[\![V]\!]\), again modulo the equations of motion operator. The first term has a nonzero trace anomaly given by
Here \(\dot \Xi\) is the field vector in Equation (3.76); furthermore \({W^i} = \left({0,\, \ldots \,,\,0,\,{\rho \over {bh}}W\left({\rho, \,\lambda} \right)} \right)\), where W(ρ, Λ) is a functional of h which receives contributions only at three and higher loop orders (see Section B.3 and [154]). The improvement term is determined by the function f = f[h] in Equation (3.81), which in turn is largely determined by h and thus cannot be freely chosen as a function of ρ.
It is therefore a very nontrivial match that (i) upon insertion of the fixed point h = h^{beta} the function \({f^{{\rm{beta}}}}\left(\rho \right): = \bar f\left[ {{h^{{\rm{beta}}}}} \right]\left(\rho \right)\) becomes stationary (μindependent), (ii) the equation F_{f}[h^{beta}] f^{beta} = 0 turns out to determine f^{beta}(ρ) completely, and (iii) the sodetermined function has the property that \({\partial ^2}[\![V]\!]{\vert_{f = {f^{{\rm{beta}}}}}}\) precisely cancels the second term in Equation (3.100) evaluated for h^{beta}. Thus the trace anomaly vanishes precisely at the fixed point of the coupling flow
As should be clear from the derivation this is a nontrivial property of the system, rather than one which is used to define the renormalized target space metric ɧ_{ij}(ϕ). The latter is already determined by the warped product structure (3.59, 3.60) and the renormalization result (3.57). At the fixed point h^{beta} the first term in Equation (3.100) vanishes, but the second then is completely determined. On the other hand by Equation (3.81) one is not free to choose the improvement potential as a function of ρindependent of h, so the cancellation is not built in. One can also verify that the only solution for f[h] such that \([\![{T^\mu}_\mu (h;\,\phi ]\!] = {\partial ^\mu}{K_\mu}\left(h \right)\) is h = h^{beta} with the above f^{beta}, such that Equation (3.101) holds. That is, scale invariance implies here conformal invariance. Since the target space metric (3.60) has indefinite signature this does not follow from general grounds [176, 194].
Due to Equation (3.101) we can now define the quantum constraints by
The linear combinations \([\![{{\mathcal H}_0} \pm {{\mathcal H}_1}]\!]\) are thus expected to generate two commuting copies of a Virasoro algebra with formal central charge c = 2 + dim G/H. This central charge is only formal because it refers to a state space with indefinite norm (see [127, 128] for an anomalyfree implementation of the Virasoro constraints in essentially noninteracting systems). In the case at hand the proper positivity requirement will be determined by the quantum observables commuting with the constraints. Their construction and the exploration of the physical state space is a major desideratum. In summary, the systems should at the fixed point be described by one whose physical states can be set into correspondence to the above quantum observables. The infrared problem has not been investigated so far, but based on results in the polarized subsector [153] one might expect it to be benign.
Despite the fact that the system is conformally invariant at the fixed point there are still scale dependent running parameters. At first sight this seems paradoxical. However, already the example of the massless continuum limit in a 3D scalar field theory exhibits this behavior. The remaining scale parameter is related to the direction of instability within the critical manifold, pointing from the Gaussian to the FisherWilson fixed point, in the direction of coarse graining. The systems considered here provide an intriguing other example of this phenomenon. The critical manifold can be identified with the subset of parameter values where the system is scale (and here conformally) invariant. This fixes h(·) = h^{beta}(·), but the inessential parameters contained in the renormalized fields are left unconstrained. This allows one to introduce a running parameter as follows. One evaluates the running coupling function \(\bar h\) at the ‘comoving’ field \(\bar \rho\) and sets
This quantity carries a twofold μdependence, one via the running coupling \(\mu \mapsto \bar h\left({\cdot, \,\mu} \right)\) and one because now the argument at which the function is evaluated is likewise μdependent. Since ρ is a field on the base manifold, the quantity ḡ_{h}(μ) depends parametrically on the value of h(ρ(x)) — and hence on x. Combining Equation (3.83) with Equation (3.75) one finds the following flow equation:
These are the usual flow equations for the single coupling G/H sigmamodel without coupling to gravity! In other words the ‘gravitationally dressed’ functional flow for \(\bar h\) has been ‘undressed’ by reference to the scale dependent ‘rod field’ \(\bar \rho\) (the term is adapted from H. Weyl’s “Maßstabsfeld”). The Equations (3.104) are not by themselves useful for renormalization purposes — which requires determination of the flow of \(\bar h\left({\cdot ,\,\mu} \right)\) with respect to a fixed set of field coordinates. Moreover in the technical sense ḡ_{h} is an “inessential” parameter. The fact that the scale dependence of ḡ_{h} is governed by the beta function β_{G/H} means that for increasing μ it will be driven away from the fixed point g_{h} = 0. The condition g_{h}(x, λ) ≡ 0 can be traded for the specification of the Gaussian fixed point g(ϱ; λ) ≡ 0. Thus the parameter flow ḡ_{h} may be viewed as a coupling flow emanating (in the direction of increasing μ) from the Gaussian fixed point. At the nonGaussian fixed point, on the other hand, ḡ_{h} governs the scale dependence of the ‘rod field’ \({\bar \rho ^{{\rm{beta}}}}\left({x,\,\mu} \right): = \bar \rho \left({x,\,\mu} \right)\vert h = {h^{{\rm{beta}}}}\) via
This follows from Equation (3.75) and the relation \(h{\dot \Xi ^3}\left[ h \right]{\vert_{h = {h^{{\rm{beta}}}}}} = \rho {\zeta _1}{\lambda \over {2\pi}}\). Here we indicated the functional dependence of ḡ_{h} on \({{\rm{\bar g}}_h}\), which at the nonGaussian fixed point gives a dependence of ḡ_{h} beta on \({\bar \rho ^{{\rm{beta}}}}\). Since ζ_{1} < 0, one sees from Equation (3.105) that \({\bar \rho ^{{\rm{beta}}}}\) is pointwise for all x a decreasing function of μ, at least locally in μ. In addition Equation (3.87) implies
Here χ^{±}(·,μ) are functions of one variable which by Equation (3.105) are locally decreasing in μ and x^{±} = (x^{0} ± x^{1})/2 are lightcone coordinates. Since the theory is conformally invariant at the fixed point (of the couplings) one can change coordinates x^{±} ↦ Χ^{±} to bring scaling operators into a standard form. The upshot is, as anticipated in Section 3.2, that the rod field \({\bar \rho ^{{\rm{beta}}}}\) describes the local scale changes dynamically induced by quantum gravity and defines a resolution scale for the geometries.
For orientation we summarize here our results on the renormalization of the symmetry reduced Quantum Einstein Gravity theories (3.1):

1.
The systems inherit the lack of standard perturbative renormalizability from the full theory. A cutoff independent quantum theory can be achieved at the expense of introducing infinitely many couplings combined into a generating function h(·) of one variable.

2.
The argument of this function is the ‘area radius’ field ρ associated with the two Killing vectors. The field ρ is (nonlinearly) renormalized but no extra renormalizations are needed to define arbitrary powers thereof.

3.
A universal formula for the beta functional for h and hence for the infinitely many couplings contained in it can be given. The flow possesses a Gaussian as well as a nonGaussian fixed point. With respect to the nonGaussian fixed point all couplings in h are asymptotically safe.

4.
At the fixed point the trace anomaly vanishes and the quantum constraints (welldefined as composite operators) \([\![{{\mathcal H}_0}]\!],\,[\![{{\mathcal H}_1}]\!]\) can in principle be imposed. The linear combinations \([\![{{\mathcal H}_0} \pm {{\mathcal H}_1}]\!]\) are expected to generate commuting copies of a centrally extended conformal algebra acting on an indefinite metric Hilbert space.

5.
Despite the conformal invariance at the fixed point there is a scale dependent local parameter, whose scale dependence is governed by the beta function of the G/H sigmamodel without coupling to gravity.
So far we considered the renormalization of the symmetry reduced theories in its own right, leaving the embedding into the full Quantum Gravidynamics open. The proposed relation to qualitative aspects of the Quantum Gravidynamics in the extreme UV has already been mentioned. Here we offer some tentative remarks on the embedding otherwise. The constructions presented in this section can be extended to 2 + ϵ dimensions in the spirit of an ϵexpansion. At the same time this mimics quantum aspects of the 1Killing vector reduction. One finds that the qualitative features of the renormalization flow — nonGaussian fixed point and asymptotic safety — are still present [156]. A cosmological ‘constant’ term can likewise be included and displays a similar pattern as outlined at the end of Section 3.2. The advantage of this setting is that the UV cutoff can strictly be removed, which is hard to achieve with a nonperturbative technique. The extension of these results from a quasiperturbative analysis to a nonperturbative one, ideally via controlled approximations, is an important open problem. The same holds for the analysis of the 1Killing vector reduction, which holds the potential for cosmological applications. These truncations can be viewed as complementary to the ‘hierarchical’ truncations used in Section 4: A manifest truncation is initially imposed on the functional integral, but the infinite coupling renormalization flow can then be studied in great detail, often without further approximations.
4 Asymptotic Safety from the Effective Average Action
As surveyed in the introduction, important evidence for the asymptotic safety scenario comes from the truncated flow of the effective average action, as computed from its functional renormalization flow equation (FRGE). In this section we use the term Quantum Einstein Gravity to refer to a version of Quantum Gravidynamics where the metric is used as the dynamical variable. The key results have been outlined in the introduction. Here we present in more detail the effective average action for gravity, its flow equation, and the results obtained from its truncations.
4.1 The effective average action for gravity and its FRGE
The effective average action is a scale dependent variant Γ_{k} of the usual effective action Γ, modified by a modecutoff k, such that Γ_{k} can be interpreted as describing an ‘effective field theory at scale k’. For nongauge theories a selfcontained summary of this formalism can be found in Appendix C. In the application to gauge theories and gravity two conceptual problems occur.
First the standard effective action is not a gauge invariant functional of its argument. For example if in a YangMills theory one gaugefixes the functional integral with an ordinary gauge fixing condition like \({\partial ^\mu}A_\mu ^a = 0\), couples the YangMills field \(A_\mu ^a\) to a source, and constructs the ordinary effective action, the resulting functional \(\Gamma \left[ {A_\mu ^a} \right]\) is not invariant under the gauge transformations of \({A_\mu ^a}\). Although physical quantities extracted from \(\Gamma \left[ {A_\mu ^a} \right]\) are expected to be gauge invariant, the noninvariance is cumbersome for renormalization purposes. The second problem is related to the fact that in a gauge theory a “coarse graining” based on a naive Fourier decomposition of \(A_\mu ^a\left(x \right)\) is not gauge covariant and hence not physical. In fact, if one were to gauge transform a slowly varying \(A_\mu ^a\left(x \right)\) with a parameter function ω(x) with a fast xvariation, a gauge field with a fast xvariation would arise, which however still describes the same physics.
Both problems can be overcome by using the background field formalism. The background effective action generally is a gauge invariant functional of its argument (see Appendix B). The second problem is overcome by using the spectrum of a covariant differential operator built from the background field configuration to discrimate between slow modes (small eigenvalues) and fast modes (large eigenvalues) [187]. This sacrifices to some extent the intuition of a spatial coarse graining, but it produces a gauge invariant separation of modes. Applied to a nongauge theory it amounts to expanding the field in terms of eigenfunctions of the (positive) operator −∂^{2} and declaring its eigenmodes ‘long’ or ‘short’ wavelength depending on whether the corresponding p^{2} is smaller or larger than a given k^{2}.
This is the strategy adopted to define the effective average action for gravity [179]. In short: The effective average action for gravity is a variant of the background effective action \(\Gamma \left[ {\left\langle {{f_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle ,\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{{\bar \sigma}_\alpha};\,{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}} \right]\) described in Appendix B (see Equations (B.48, B.51)), where the bare action is modified by mode cutoff terms as in Appendix C, but with the mode cutoff defined via the spectrum of a covariant differential operator built from the background metric. For convenience we quickly recapitulate the main features of the background field technique here and then describe the modifications needed for the mode cutoff.
The initial bare action S[g] is assumed to be a reparameterization invariant functional of the metric g = (g_{αβ})_{1≤α,β≤d}. Infinitesimally the invariance reads \(S\left[ {g + {\mathcal{L}_v}g} \right] = S\left[ g \right] + O\left({{v^2}} \right)\), where \({{{\mathcal L}_v}g}\) is the Lie derivative of g with respect to the vector field v^{γ}∂_{γ}. The metric g (later the integration variable in the functional integral) is decomposed into a background ḡ and a fluctuation f, i.e. g_{αβ} = ḡ_{αβ} + f_{αβ}. The fluctuation field f_{αβ} is then taken as the dynamical variable over which the functional integral is performed; it is not assumed to be small in some sense, no expansion in powers of f is implied by the split. Note however that this linear split does not have a geometrical meaning in the space of geometries. The symmetry variation \({g_{\alpha \beta}} \mapsto {g_{\alpha \beta}} + {\mathcal{L}_v}{g_{\alpha \beta}}\) can be decomposed in two different ways
We shall refer to the first one as “genuine gauge transformations” and to the second one as the “background gauge transformations”. The background effective action \(\Gamma \left[ {\left\langle {{f_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle ,\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{{\bar \sigma}_\alpha};\,{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}} \right]\) is a functional of the expectation value 〈f_{αβ}〉 of the fluctuation variable, the background metric ḡ_{αβ}, and the expectation values of the ghost fields \({\sigma ^\alpha} = \left\langle {{C^\alpha}} \right\rangle ,\,{\bar \sigma _\alpha} = \left\langle {{{\bar C}_\alpha}} \right\rangle\). Importantly \(\Gamma \left[ {\left\langle {{f_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle ,\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{{\bar \sigma}_\alpha};\,{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}} \right]\) is invariant under the background field transformations (4.2). So far one should think of the background geometry as being prescribed but of generic form; eventually it is adjusted selfconsistently by a condition involving the full effective action (see Equation (2.48) and Appendix B).
In the next step the initial bare action should be replaced by one involving a mode cutoff term. In the background field technique the mode cutoff should be done in a way that preserves the invariance under the background gauge transformations (4.2). We now first present the steps leading to the scale dependent effective average action \({\Gamma _k}\left[ {\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle  {{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}},\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{{\bar \sigma}_\alpha};\,{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}} \right]\) in some detail and then present the FRGE for it. The functional integrals occuring are largely formal; for definiteness we consider the Euclidean variant where the integral over Riemannian geometries is intended. The precise definition of the generating functionals is not essential here, as they mainly serve to arrive at the gravitional FRGE. The latter provides a novel tool for investigating the gravitational renormalization flow.
We begin by introducing a scale dependent variant W_{k} of the generating functional of the connected Greens functions. The cutoff scale is again denoted by k, it has unit mass dimension, and no physics interpretation off hand. The defining relation for W_{k} reads
Here the measure \(\mathcal{D}{\mu _{\jmath ,\,\bar \jmath ,\,k}}\left[ f \right]\) differs from the naive one, \({\mathcal D}{f_{\alpha \beta}}\), by gauge fixing terms and an integration over ghost fields C^{α}, \({\bar C_\alpha}\), where the action for the latter is again modified by a modecutoff:
The first term in the exponent is the gauge fixing term. The gauge fixing condition Q_{α} = Q_{a}[ḡ; f] ≈ 0 must be invariant under Equation (4.2), for the moment we may leave it unspecified. The second term is the FaddeevPopov action for the ghosts obtained in the usual way: One applies a genuine gauge transformation (4.1) to Q_{α} and replaces the parameter v^{α} by the ghost field C^{α}. The integral over C^{α} and \({\bar C_\alpha}\) then exponentiates the FadeevPopov determinant det[(δQ_{α}/δv^{β}]. This gauge fixing procedure has a somewhat perturbative flavor; large scale aspects of the space of geometries are not adequately taken into account. The terms \(C_k^{{\rm{grav}}}\) and \(C_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\) implement the mode cutof in the gravity and the ghost sector, respectively. We shall specify them shortly. Finally we coupled in Equation (4.4) the ghosts to sources j^{α}, \({\bar \jmath _\alpha}\) for later use.
The construction of the effective average action now parallels that in the scalar case. We quickly run through the relevant steps. The Legendre transform of W_{k} at fixed ḡ_{αβ} is
As usual, if W_{k} is differentiable with respect to the sources, the extremizing source configurations \(J_{\ast}^{\alpha \beta},\,{\bar \jmath _{{\ast},\alpha}},\,\jmath _{\ast}^\alpha\) allow one to interpret \({\bar f_{\alpha \beta}},\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{\bar \sigma _\alpha}\) as the expectation values of f_{αβ}, C^{α}, \({\bar C_\alpha}\) via
Note that the expectation values defined through Equation (4.3) are in general both kdependent and source dependent. In Equation (4.6), by construction, the kdependence carried by W_{k} cancels that carried by the extremizing source. Concretely the extremizing sources are constructed by assuming that W_{k} has a series expansion in powers of the sources with ḡdependent coefficients; formal inversion of the series then gives a kdependent \(J_{\ast}^{\alpha \beta}\left[ {\bar f,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma ;\,\bar g} \right]\) with the property that \(J_{\ast}^{\alpha \beta}\left[ {0,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma ;\,\bar g} \right] = 0\), and similarly for the ghost sources. The formal effective field equations dual to Equation (4.6) read
As in the scalar case the effective average action differs from \({\tilde \Gamma _k}\) by the cutoff action with the expectation value fields inserted,
Sometimes it is convenient to introduce \(\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle : = {\bar g_{\alpha \beta}} + {\bar f_{\alpha \beta}}\), which is the expectation value of the original ‘quantum’ metric g_{αβ} = ḡ_{αβ} + f_{αβ}, and to regard Γ_{k} as a functional of 〈g_{αβ}〉 rather than \({\bar f_{\alpha \beta}}\), i.e. \({\Gamma _k}\left[ {\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle ,\,{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}},\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{{\bar \sigma}_\alpha}} \right]: = {\Gamma _k}\left[ {\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle  {{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}},\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma ;\,\bar g} \right]\).
Usually one is not interested in correlation functions involving FaddeevPopov ghosts and it is sufficient to know the reduced functional
As indicated we shall simply write g_{αβ} for its argument 〈g_{αβ}〉 = ḡ_{αβ}.
The precise form of the gauge condition Q_{α}[ḡ; f] is inessential, only the invariance under Equation (4.2) is important. It ensures that the associated ghost action is invariant under Equation (4.2) and \(\delta {C^\alpha} = {\mathcal{L}_v}{C^\alpha},\,\delta {\bar C_\alpha} = {\mathcal{L}_v}{\bar C_\alpha}\). We shall ignore the problem of the global existence of gauge slices (“Gribov copies”), in accordance with the formal nature of the construction. For later reference let us briefly describe the most widely used gauge condition, the “background harmonic gauge” which reads
The covariant derivative \({\bar \nabla _\alpha}\) involves the Christoffel symbols \(\bar \Gamma _{\alpha \beta}^\gamma\) of the background metric. Note that Q_{α} of Equation (4.10) is linear in the quantum field f_{αβ}. On a flat background with ḡ_{αβ} = η_{αβ} the condition Q_{α} = 0 reduces to the familiar harmonic gauge condition, \({\partial ^\beta}{f_{\beta \alpha}} = {1 \over 2}{\partial _\alpha}{f_\beta}^\beta\). In Equation (4.10) κ is an arbitrary constant with the dimension of a mass. We shall set κ = (2g_{N})^{−1/2} and interpret g_{N} = 16πG as the bare Newton constant. The ghost action for the gauge condition (4.10) is
where ∇_{α} and \({\bar \nabla _\alpha}\) are the covariant derivatives associated with g_{αβ} (as a short for ḡ_{αβ} + f_{αβ}) and ḡ_{αβ}, respectively.
The last ingredient in Equations (4.3, 4.4) to be specified are the mode cutoff terms, not present in the usual background effective action. Their precise form is arbitrary to some extent. Naturally they will be taken quadratic in the respective fields, with a kernel which is covariant under background gauge transformations. These requirements are met if
and the kernels \({\mathcal{R}_k}\left[ {\bar g} \right],\,\mathcal{R}_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\) transform covariantly under \({\bar g_{\alpha \beta}} \mapsto {\bar g_{\alpha \beta}} + {{\mathcal L}_v}{\bar g_{\alpha \beta}}\). In addition they should effectively suppress covariant ‘momentum modes’ with ‘momenta’ p^{2} < k^{2}. As mentioned earlier one way of defining such a covariant scale is via the spectrum of a covariant differential operator. Concretely the following choice will be used.
Consider the Laplacian \({\Delta _{\bar g}}: = {\bar g^{\alpha \beta}}{\bar \nabla _\alpha}{\bar \nabla _\beta}\) of the Riemannian background metric ḡ with \(\bar \nabla\) being its torsionfree connection. We assume ḡ to be such that −Δ_{ḡ} has a nonnegative spectrum and a complete set of (tensorial) eigenfunctions. The spectral values λ = λ[ḡ] of −Δ_{ḡ} will then be functionals of ḡ and one can choose \({{\mathcal R}_k}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\) and \({\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\) such that only eigenmodes with spectral values λ[ḡ] ≫ k^{2} (2 being the mass dimension of the operator) enter the f_{αβ} functional integral unsuppressed. Here one should think of the f_{αβ} functional integral as being replaced by one over the (complete system of) eigenfunctions of −Δ_{ḡ}, for a fixed ḡ. Concretely, for \({\mathcal {R}_k}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\) and \({\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\) we take expressions of the form
As indicated in Equation (4.14) the prefactors \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) are different for the gravitational and the ghost cutoff. For the ghosts \({\mathcal Z}_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\) is a pure number, whereas for the metric fluctuation \({\mathcal Z}_k^{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\) is a tensor constructed from the background metric ḡ_{αβ}. We shall discuss the choice of these prefactors later on.
The essential ingredient in Equation (4.14) is a function \({{\mathcal R}^{\left(0 \right)}}:{\mathbb{R}_ +} \rightarrow {\mathbb{R}_ +}\) interpolating smoothly between \({{\mathcal R}^{\left(0 \right)}}\left(0 \right) = 1\) and \({{\mathcal R}^{\left(0 \right)}}\left(\infty \right) = 0\); for example
Its argument v should be identified with the weighted spectral values λ[ḡ]/k^{2} of −Δ_{ḡ}. One readily sees that then the exponentials in Equation (4.13) have the desired effect: They effectively suppress eigenmodes of − Δ_{ḡ} with spectral values much smaller than k^{2}, while modes with λ[ḡ] large compared to k^{2} are unaffected. This also illustrates that a mode suppression can be defined covariantly using the background field formalism.
This concludes the definition of the effective average action and its various specializations. We now present its key properties.
4.1.1 Properties of the effective average action

1.
The effective average action is invariant under background field diffeomorphisms
$${\Gamma _k}[\Phi + {{\mathcal L}_\nu}\Phi ] = {\Gamma _k}[\Phi ],\quad \quad \Phi \,: = \left\{{\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle ,{{\overline g}_{\alpha \beta}},{\sigma ^\alpha},{{\overline \sigma}_\alpha}} \right\},$$((4.16))where all its arguments transform as tensors of the corresponding rank. This is a direct consequence of the corresponding property of W_{k} in Equation (4.3)
$${W_k}[{\mathcal J} + {{\mathcal L}_\nu}{\mathcal J}] = {W_k}[{\mathcal J}],\quad \quad {\mathcal J}\,: = \left\{{{J^{\alpha \beta}},{j^\alpha},{{\overline j}_\alpha},{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\},$$((4.17))where \({{\mathcal L}_v}\) is the Lie derivative of the respective tensor type. Here Equation (4.16) is obtained as in Equation (B.47) of Appendix B, where the background covariance of the mode cutoff terms (4.13) is essential. Further the measure \({\mathcal D}{f_{\alpha \beta}}\) is assumed to be diffeomorphism invariant.

2.
It satisfies the functional integrodifferential equation
$$\begin{array}{*{20}c} {\exp \{ {\Gamma _k}[\bar f,\sigma ,\bar \sigma ;\bar g]\} = \int {{\mathcal D}f\,{\mathcal D}C\,{\mathcal D}\bar C\,\exp \left\{{ {S_{{\rm{tot}}}}[f,C,\bar C;\bar g]} \right.  {C_k}[f  \bar f,C  \sigma ,\bar C  \bar \sigma ]} \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad} \\ {\left. {+ \int {dx} \sqrt {\bar g} \left[ {({f_{\alpha \beta}}  {{\bar f}_{\alpha \beta}}){{\delta {\Gamma _k}} \over {\delta {{\bar f}_{\alpha \beta}}}} + ({C^\alpha}  {\sigma ^\alpha}){{\delta {\Gamma _k}} \over {\delta {\sigma ^\alpha}}} + ({C_\alpha}  {{\bar \sigma}_\alpha}){{\delta {\Gamma _k}} \over {\delta {{\bar \sigma}_\alpha}}}} \right]} \right\},} \\ \end{array}$$((4.18))where S_{tot} ≔ S + S_{gf} + S_{gh} (with S_{gf} and S_{gh} minus the first two terms in the exponent of Equation (4.4) and \({C_k}: = C_k^{{\rm{grav}}} + C_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\).

3.
The kdependence of the effective average action is governed by an exact FRGE. Following the same lines as in the scalar case one arrives at [179]
$$\begin{array}{*{20}c} {k{\partial _k}{\Gamma _k}[\bar f,\sigma ,\bar \sigma ;\bar g] = {1 \over 2}{\rm{Tr}}\left[ {\left({\Gamma _k^{(2)} + {{\hat{\mathcal R}}_k}} \right)_{\bar f\,\bar f}^{ 1}{{\left({k{\partial _k}{{\hat{\mathcal R}}_k}} \right)}_{\bar f\,\bar f}}} \right]\quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad \quad} \\ { {1 \over 2}{\rm{Tr}}\left[ {\left\{{\left({\Gamma _k^{(2)} + {{\hat{\mathcal R}}_k}} \right)_{\bar \sigma \sigma}^{ 1}  \left({\Gamma _k^{(2)} + {{\hat{\mathcal R}}_k}} \right)_{\sigma \bar \sigma}^{ 1}{{\left({k{\partial _k}{{\hat{\mathcal R}}_k}} \right)}_{\bar \sigma \sigma}}} \right\}} \right].} \\ \end{array}$$((4.19))Here \(\Gamma _k^{\left(2 \right)}\) denotes the Hessian of Γ_{k} with respect to the dynamical fields \(\bar f,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma\) at fixed ḡ. It is a block matrix labeled by the fields \({\varphi _i}: = \left\{{{{\bar f}_{\alpha \beta}},\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{{\bar \sigma}_\alpha}} \right\}\),
$$\tilde \Gamma _k^{(2)ij}(x,y)\,: = {1 \over {\sqrt {\overline g (x)\overline g (y)}}}{{{\delta ^2}{{\tilde \Gamma}_k}} \over {\delta {\varphi _i}(x)\,\delta {\varphi _j}(y)}}.$$((4.20))(In the ghost sector the derivatives are understood as left derivatives.) Likewise, \({\hat {\mathcal R}_k}\) is a block matrix with entries \(\left({{{\hat {\mathcal R}}_k}} \right)_{\bar f\bar f}^{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}: = {\kappa ^2}{\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{grav}}}{\left[ {\bar g} \right]^{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}}\) and \({\hat {\mathcal R}_{\bar \sigma \sigma}} = \sqrt 2 \hat {\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\). Performing the trace in the position representation it includes an integration \(\int {dx\sqrt {\bar g\left(x \right)}}\) involving the background volume element. For any cutoff which is qualitatively similar to Equation (4.14, 4.15) the traces on the righthandside of Equation (4.19) are well convergent, both in the infrared and in the ultraviolet. By virtue of the factor \(k{\partial _k}{{\hat {\mathcal R}}_k}\), the dominant contributions come from a narrow band of generalized momenta centered around k. Large momenta are exponentially suppressed.
The conceptual status and the use of the gravitational FRGE (4.20) is the same in the scalar case discussed in Section 2.2. Its perturbative expansion should reproduce the traditional nonrenormalizable cutoff dependencies starting from twoloops. In the context of the asymptotic safety scenario the hypothesis at stake is that in an exact treatment of the equation the cutoff dependencies entering through the initial data get reshuffled in a way compatible with asymptotic safety. The Criterion (FRGC1) for the existence of a genuine continuuum limit discussed in Section 2.3 also applies to Equation (4.20). In brief, provided a global solution of the FRGE (4.20) can be found (one which exists for all 0 ≤ k ≤ ∞), it can reasonably be identified with a renormalized effective average action lim_{Λ→∞} Γ_{Λ,k} constructed by other means. The intricacies of the renormalization process have been shifted to the search for finetuned initial functionals for which a global solution of Equation (4.20) exists. For such a global solution lim_{k→0} Γ_{k} then is the full quantum effective action and lim_{k→∞} Γ_{k} = S_{*} is the fixed point action. As already noted in Section 2.3 the appropriate positivity requirement (FRGC2) remains to be formulated; one aspect of it concerns the choice of \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) factors in Equation (4.13) and will be discussed below.
The background gauge invariance of Γ_{k} expressed in Equation (4.16) is of great practical importance. It ensures that if the initial functional does not contain noninvariant terms, the flow implied by the above FRGE will not generate such terms. In contrast locality is not preserved of course; even if the initial functional is local the flow generates all sorts of terms, both local and nonlocal, compatible with the symmetries.
For the derivation of the flow equation it is important that the cutoff functionals in Equation (4.13) are quadratic in the fluctuation fields; only then a flow equation arises which contains only second functional derivatives of Γ_{k}, but no higher ones. For example using a cutoff operator involving the Laplace operator of the full metric g_{αβ} = ḡ_{αβ} + f_{αβ} would result in prohibitively complicated flow equations which could hardly be used for practical computations.
For most purposes the reduced effective average action (4.9) is suffient and it is likewise background invariant, \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}\left[ {g + {{\mathcal L}_v}g} \right] = {{\bar \Gamma}_k}\left[ g \right]\). Unfortunately \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}\left[ {{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}} \right]\) does not satisfy an exact FRGE, basically because it contains too little information. The actual RG evolution has to be performed at the level of the functional \({\Gamma _k}\left[ {\left\langle g \right\rangle ,\,\bar g,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma} \right]\). Only after the evolution one may set \(\left\langle g \right\rangle = \bar g,\,\sigma = 0,\,\bar \sigma = 0\). As a result, the actual theory space of Quantum Einstein Gravity in this setting consists of functionals of all four variables, \(\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle ,\,{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}},\,{\sigma ^\alpha},\,{{\bar \sigma}_\alpha}\), subject to the invariance condition (4.9). Since \(\Gamma _k^{\left(2 \right)}\) involves derivatives with respect to \({{\bar f}_{\alpha \beta}}\) at fixed ḡ_{αβ} it is clear that the evolution cannot be formulated in terms of \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}\) alone.

4.
\({\Gamma _k} = \left[ {\bar f,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma ;\,\bar g} \right]\) approaches for k → 0 the background effective action of Appendix B, since \({\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{grav}}},\,{\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\) vanish for k → 0. The k → ∞ limit can be infered from Equation (4.18) by the same reasoning as in the scalar case (see Appendix C). This gives
$$\underset{k \rightarrow \infty}{\lim} \,{\Gamma _k}[\overline f ,\sigma ,\overline \sigma ;\overline g ] = {S_{{\rm{tot}}}}[\overline f ,\sigma ,\overline \sigma ;\overline g ].$$((4.21))Note that the bare initial functional Γ_{k} includes the gauge fixing and ghost actions. At the level of the functional \({\bar \Gamma _k}\left[ g \right]\) Equation (4.21) reduces to \({\lim\nolimits_{k \rightarrow \infty}}{\bar \Gamma _k}\left[ g \right] = S\left[ g \right]\).

5.
The effective average action satisfies a functional BRST Ward identity which reflects the invariance of S_{tot} under the BRST transformations
$$\begin{array}{*{20}c} {{\delta _\epsilon}{f_{\alpha \beta}} = \epsilon {\kappa ^{ 2}}{{\mathcal L}_C}({{\overline g}_{\alpha \beta}} + {f_{\alpha \beta}}),\quad \quad {\delta _\epsilon}{{\overline g}_{\alpha \beta}} = 0,\quad \quad \quad \quad} \\ {{\delta _\epsilon}{C^\alpha} = \epsilon {\kappa ^{ 2}}{C^\beta}{\partial _\beta}{C^\alpha},\quad \quad \quad \quad {\delta _\epsilon}{{\overline C}_\alpha} = \epsilon {{(\alpha \kappa)}^{ 1}}{Q_\alpha}.} \\ \end{array}$$((4.22))Here ϵ is an anticommuting parameter. Since the mode cutoff action C_{k} is not BRST invariant, the Ward identity differs from the standard one by terms involving \({\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{grav}}},\,{\mathcal R}_k^{{\rm{gh}}}\). For the explicit form of the identity we refer to [179].

6.
Initially the vertex (or 1PI Greens) functions are given by multiple functional derivatives of \({\Gamma _k}\left[ {\bar f,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma ;\,\bar g} \right]\) with respect to \(\bar f,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma\) at fixed ḡ and setting
$${\overline f _{\alpha \beta}} = \left\langle {{f_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle = 0,\quad \quad {\sigma ^\alpha} = \left\langle {{C^\alpha}} \right\rangle = 0,\quad \quad {\overline \sigma _\alpha} = \left\langle {{{\overline C}_\alpha}} \right\rangle = 0$$((4.23))after differentiation. The resulting multipoint functions \(\Gamma _k^{\left(n \right)}\left({{x_1},\, \ldots \,,\,{x_n};\,g} \right)\) are kdependent functionals of the (kindependent) \(\left\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \right\rangle = {{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}\). For extremizing sources obtained by formal series inversion the condition (4.23) automatically switches of the sources in Equation (4.7); for the ghosts this is consistent with Γ_{k} having ghost number zero. Note that the onepoint function \(\Gamma _k^{\left(1 \right)}\left({{x_1};\,g} \right) \equiv 0\) vanishes identically.
An equivalent set of vertex functions should in analogy to the YangMills case [68, 42, 67] be obtained by differentiating \({\Gamma _k}\left[ {\bar g,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma} \right]: = {\Gamma _k}\left[ {0,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma ;\,\bar g} \right] \equiv {\Gamma _k}\left[ {\bar g,\,\bar g,\,\sigma ,\,\bar \sigma} \right]\) with respect to ḡ. Specifically for \({\sigma ^\alpha} = {\bar \sigma _\alpha} = 0\) one gets multipoint functions \(\bar \Gamma _k^{\left(n \right)}\left({{x_1},\, \ldots \,,\,{x_n}} \right)\), with the shorthand (4.9). The solutions (ğ_{k})_{αβ} of
$${{\delta {{\overline \Gamma}_k}} \over {\delta {g_{\alpha \beta}}}}[{\overset \vee g_k}] = 0$$((4.24))play an important role in the interpretation of the formalism (see Section4.2).
The precise physics significance of the multipoint functions \(\Gamma _k^{\left(n \right)}\) and \(\bar \Gamma _k^{\left(n \right)}\) remains to be understood. One would expect them to be related to Smatrix elements on a selfconsistent background but, for example, an understanding of the correct infrared degrees of freedom is missing.
This concludes our summary of the key properties of the gravitational effective average action. Before turning to applications of this formalism, we discuss the significance and the proper choice of the \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) factors in Equation (4.14), which is one aspect of the positivity issue (FRGC2) of Section 2.2. The significance of these factors is best illustrated in the scalar case. As discussed in Appendix C in scalar theories with more than one field it is important that all fields are cut off at the same k^{2}. This is achieved by a cutoff function of the form (C.21) where \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) is in general a matrix in field space. In the sector of modes with inverse propagator \({Z_k}^{\left(i \right)}{p^2} + \ldots\) the matrix \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) is diagonal with entries \({{\mathcal Z}_k} = Z_k^{\left(i \right)}\). In a scalar field theory these \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) factors are automatically positive and the flow equations in the various truncations are welldefined.
In gravity the situation may be more subtle. First, consider the case where ϕ is some normal mode of \({{\bar f}_{\alpha \beta}}\) and that it is an eigenfunction of \(\Gamma _k^{\left(2 \right)}\) with eigenvalue \(Z_k^\phi {p^2}\), where p^{2} is a positive eigenvalue of some covariant kinetic operator, typically of the form \( {{\bar \nabla}^2} + R\)terms. If \(Z_k^\phi > 0\) the situation is clear, and the rule discussed in the context of scalar theories applies: One chooses \({\mathcal Z} = Z_k^\phi\) because this guarantees that for the low momentum modes the running inverse propagator \(\Gamma _k^{\left(2 \right)} + {{\mathcal R}_k}\) becomes \(Z_k^\phi \left({{p^2} + {k^2}} \right)\), exactly as it should be.
More tricky is the question how \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) should be chosen if \(Z_k^\phi\) is negative. If one continues to use \({{\mathcal Z}_k} = Z_k^\phi\), the evolution equation is perfectly well defined because the inverse propagator \( \left\vert {Z_k^\phi} \right\vert\left({{p^2} + {k^2}} \right)\) never vanishes, and the traces of Equation (4.19) are not suffering from any infrared problems. In fact, if we write down the perturbative expansion for the functional trace, for instance, it is clear that all propagators are correctly cut off in the infrared, and that loop momenta smaller than k are suppressed. On the other hand, if we set \({{\mathcal Z}_k} =  Z_k^\phi\), then \( \left\vert {Z_k^\phi} \right\vert\left({{p^2}  {k^2}} \right)\) introduces a spurios singularity at p^{2} = k^{2}, and the cutoff fails to make the theory infrared finite. This choice of \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) is ruled out therefore. At first sight the choice \({{\mathcal Z}_k} =  Z_k^\phi\) might have appeared more natural because only if \({{\mathcal Z}_k} > 0\) the factor \(\exp \left({ {C_k}} \right) \sim \exp \left({ \int \phi {{\mathcal R}_k}\phi} \right)\) is a damped exponentially which suppresses the low momentum modes in the usual way. For the other choice \({{\mathcal Z}_k} = + Z_k^\phi < 0\) the factor \(\exp \left\{{\int {\left\vert {{{\mathcal R}_k}} \right\vert{\phi ^2}}} \right\}\) is a growing exponential instead and, at least at first sight, seems to enhance rather than suppress the infrared modes. However, as suggested by the perturbative argument, this conclusion is too naive perhaps.
In all existing RG studies using this formalism the choice
has been adopted, and there is little doubt that, within those necessarily truncated calculations, this is the correct procedure. Besides the perturbative considerations above there are various arguments of a more general nature which support Equation (4.25):

At least formally the construction of the effective average action can be repeated for Lorentzian signature metrics. Then one deals with oscillating exponentials e^{iS}, and for arguments like the one leading to Equation (4.21) one has to employ the RiemannLebesgue lemma. Apart from the obvious substitutions, \({\Gamma _k} \rightarrow  i{\Gamma _k},\,{{\mathcal R}_k} \rightarrow  i{{\mathcal R}_k}\), the evolution equation remains unaltered. For \({{\mathcal Z}_k} = Z_k^\phi\) it has all the desired features, and \(Z_k^\phi < 0\) seems not to pose any special problem, since \(\exp \left\{{\pm i\int {\phi \left\vert {{{\mathcal R}_k}} \right\vert\phi}} \right\}\) for either sign leads to an IR suppression.

For finite k the Euclidean FRGE is perfectly welldefined even if \({{\mathcal Z}_k} < 0\), while the status of the Euclidean functional integral with its growing exponential seems problematic. In principle there exists the possibility of declaring the FRGE the primary object. If a global solution to it exists this functional might define a consistent quantum theory of gravity even though the functional integral per se does not exist. As noted in Section 3.4 the inclusion of ‘other desirable’ features might then be more difficult, though.

It might be, and there exist indications in this direction [131, 132], that for the exact RG flow \(\Gamma _k^{\left(2 \right)}\) is always a positive operator (one with positive spectrum) along physically relevant RG trajectories. Then \(Z_k^\phi > 0\) for all modes and the problem does not arise. If this contention is correct, the \(Z_k^\phi < 0\) phenomenon which is known to occur in certain truncations would be an artifact of the approximations made.
In fact, as we shall discuss in more detail later on, the to date best truncation used for the investigation of asymptotic safety (“R^{2} truncation”) has only positive \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\) factors in the relevant regime. On the other hand, the simpler “EinsteinHilbert truncation” has also negative \({{\mathcal Z}_k}\). If one applies the rule (4.25) to it, the EinsteinHilbert truncation produces almost the same results as the R^{2} truncations [131, 132]. This is a strong argument in favor of the \({{\mathcal Z}_k} = + Z_k^\phi\) rule.
In [133, 131] a slightly more general variant of the construction described here has been employed. In order to facilitate the calculation of the functional traces in the FRGE (4.19) it is helpful to employ a transversetraceless (TT) decomposition of the metric: \({f_{\alpha \beta}} = f_{\alpha \beta}^T + {{\bar \nabla}_\alpha}{V_\beta} + {{\bar \nabla}_\beta}{V_\alpha} + {{\bar \nabla}_\alpha}{{\bar \nabla}_{\beta \sigma}}  {d^{ 1}}{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}{{\bar \nabla}^2}\sigma + {d^{ 1}}{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}\phi = {{\hat f}_{\alpha \beta}} + {d^{ 1}}{{\bar g}_{\alpha \beta}}\phi\). Here \(f_{\alpha \beta}^T\) is a transverse traceless tensor, V_{α} a transverse vector, and σ and ϕ are scalars. In this framework it is natural to formulate the cutoff in terms of the component fields appearing in the TT decomposition \({C_k} \sim \int {f_{\alpha \beta}^T} {{\mathcal R}_k}{f^{{T^{\alpha \beta}}}} + \int {{V_\alpha}{{\mathcal R}_k}} {V^\alpha} + \ldots\). This cutoff is referred to as a cutoff of “type B”, in contradistinction to the “type A” cutoff described above, \({C_k} \sim \int {{f_{\alpha \beta}}} {{\mathcal R}_k}{f^{\alpha \beta}}\). Since covariant derivatives do not commute, the two cutofs are not exactly equal even if they contain the same shape function \({{\mathcal R}^{\left(0 \right)}}\). Thus, comparing type A and type B cutoffs is an additional possibility for checking scheme (in)dependence [133, 131].
4.2 Geometries at different resolution scales
In this section we elaborate on the interpretation of the effective average action formalism in a gravitational context. Specifically we argue that Γ_{k} encodes information about ‘quantum geometries’ at different resolution scales.
Recall that the effective average action Γ_{k} may be regarded as the standard effective action where the bare action has been modified by the addition of the mode cutoff term C_{k}. Every given (exact or truncated) renormalization group (RG) trajectory can be viewed as a collection of effective field theories {Γ_{k}, 0 ≤ k ≤ ∞}. In this sense a single fundamental theory gives rise to a double infinity of effective theories — one for each trajectory and one for each value of k. As explained in Appendix C, the motivation for this construction is that one would like to be able to ‘read off’ part of the physics contents of the theory simply by inspecting the effective action relevant to the problem under consideration. If the problem has only one scale k, the values of the running couplings and masses in Γ_{k} may be treated approximately as classical parameters.
In a gravitational context this construction has been described in Section 4.1. The above effective field theory aspect has also been used in Equation (2.62) of Section 2.4. Here we elaborate on the significance of the solutions of the effective field equations that come with it. The two distinct versions have been discussed in Item 6 of the previous Section 4.1.1; here we consider
Formally these stationarity equations can be viewed as a 1parametric family of in general nonlocal generalizations of the Einstein field equations. The principle of generating or selecting physical solutions via an underlying physically acceptable state has already been described in Section 2.3. We resume this discussion below. The solutions ǧ_{k} of Equation (4.26) are kdependent simply because the equations are. The problem of identifying ‘the same’ solution for different k can in principle be addressed by introducing an evolution equation for ǧ_{k}, schematically obtained by differentiating Equation (4.26) with respect to k.
We now select a state which favors geometries that are smooth and almost flat on large scales as in Section 2.3. We can think of this state as a background dependent expectation functional \({\mathcal O} \mapsto {\left\langle {\mathcal O} \right\rangle _{\bar g}}\) where the background has been selfconsistently adjusted through the condition \({\langle {{g_{\alpha \beta}}} \rangle_{\bar g_{\ast}[ g]}} = {\bar g_{\alpha \beta}}\) (see Equation (2.48)). This switches off the source, and any fixed point of the map g ↦ ḡ_{*}[g] gives a particular solution to Equation (4.26) at k = 0, implicitly referring to the underlying state [156].
In terms of the effective average action \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}\) the state should implicitly determine a family of solutions {ğ_{k}, 0 ≤ k ≤ ∞}. Structures on a scale k_{1} are best described by \({\Gamma _{{k_1}}}\). In principle one could also use \({\Gamma _{{k_2}}}\) with k_{2} ≠ k_{1} to describe structures at scale k_{1} but then a further functional integration would be needed. It is natural to think of the family {ğ_{k}, 0 ≤ k ≤ ∞} as describing aspects of a “quantum spacetime”. By a “quantum spacetime” we mean a manifold equipped with infinitely many metrics; in general none of them will be a solution of the Einstein field equations. One should keep in mind however that the quantum counterpart of a classical spacetime is characterized by many more data than the metric expectation values ğ_{k} alone, in particular by all the higher functional derivatives of Γ_{k} evaluated at ğ_{k}. The second derivative for instance evaluated at ğ_{k} is the inverse graviton propagator in the background ğ_{k}. Note that all these higher multipoint functions probe aspects of the underlying quantum state.
By virtue of the effective field theory properties of Γ_{k} the interpretation of the metrics ğ_{k} is as follows. Features involving a typical scale k_{1} are best described by \({\Gamma _{{k_1}}}\). Hence \(\overset{\vee}{g_{k_{1}}}\) is the average metric detected in a (hypothetical) experiment which probes aspects of the quantum spacetimes with typical momenta k_{1}. In more figurative terms one can think of ğ_{k} as a ‘microscope’ whose variable ‘resolving power’ is given by the energy scale k.
This picture underlies the discussions in [135, 134] where the quantum spacetimes are viewed as fractallike and the qualitative properties of the spectral dimension (2.53) have been derived. We refer to Section 2.4 and [135, 134] for detailed expositions. The fractal aspects here refer to the generalized ‘scale’ transformations k → 2k, say. Moreover a scale dependent metric ğ_{k} associates a resolution dependent proper length to any (kindependent) curve. The kdependence of this proper length can be thought of as analogous to the wellknown example that the length of the coast line of England depends on the size of the yardstick used.
Usually the resolving power of a microscope is characterized by a length scale ℓ defined as the smallest distance of two points the microscope can distinguish. In the above analogy between the effective average action and a “microscope” the resolving power is implicitly given by the mass scale k and it is not immediate how k relates to a distance. One would like to know the minimum proper distance ℓ(k_{1}) of two points which can be distinguished in a hypothetical experiment with a probe of momentum k_{1}, effectively described by the action \({\Gamma _{{k_1}}}\). Conversely, if one wants to ‘focus’ the microscope on structures of a given proper length ℓ one must know the kvalue corresponding to this particular value of ℓ. For nongravitational theories in flat Euclidean space one has ℓ(k) ≈ π/k, but in quantum gravity the relation is more complicated.
Given a family of solutions {ğ_{k}, 0 ≤ k ≤ ∞} with the above interpretation the construction of a candidate for ℓ(k) proceeds as follows [135, 134, 184]: One considers the spectral problem of the (tensor) Laplacian − Δ_{ğk} associated with ğ_{k}. To avoid technicalities inessential for the discussion we assume that all geometries in the family {ğ_{k}} are compact and closed. The spectrum of − Δ_{ğk} will then be discrete; we write \( {\Delta _{{{\check g}_k}}}{\phi _n}\left({{{\check g}_k}} \right) = {{\mathcal E}_n}\left({{{\check g}_k}} \right){\phi _n}\left({{{\check g}_k}} \right),\,n \in \mathbb{N}\), for the spectral problem. As indicated, both the spectral values \({{\mathcal E}_n}\left(\overset{\vee}{g_{k}}\right)\) and the eigenfunctions ϕ_{n}(ğ_{k}) will now depend on k.
The collection of eigenfunctions
will be referred to as “cutoff modes at scale k”. The significance of these modes can be understood by returning to the original functional integral (4.3), which one can think of being performed over the (tensorial) eigenmodes of the kindependent Laplacian − Δ_{ḡ} of the background metric considered. Schematically \({\bar \Gamma _k}\left[ {\bar g} \right]\) contains information about the functional integral (4.3) where all the eigenmodes with spectral values \({\mathcal{E}_n}\left({\bar g} \right)\) obeying \({{\mathcal E}_n}\left({\bar g} \right) \geq {k^2}\) have been integrated out; the modes with \({{\mathcal E}_n}\left({\bar g} \right) \approx {k^2}\) are ‘the last’ to be integrated out. If one now takes for the background metric ḡ the itself kdependent solution ğ_{k}, the equation \({\mathcal{E}_n}\left(\overset{\vee}{g_{k}} \right) \approx {k^2}\) implicitly defines n and hence selects the “cutof modes at scale k”. Note that at the level of \({\bar \Gamma _k}\) the two metrics 〈g _{αβ}〉 and ḡ_{αβ} are already identified.
Given a wave function in Equation (4.27) one can now ask what a typical coordinate distance \({\Delta _k}{x^\alpha}\) is over which it varies. Converting this into a proper distance with the metric ğ_{k} defines the proposed resolving power
The definition (4.28) is motivated by the fact that the “last set of modes integrated out” should set the length scale over which the (covariant version) of the averaging has been performed. In this sense ℓ(k; x) is a substitute for the “blocking size” in the spirit of KadanofWilson. The scale ℓ(k; x) may vary with the point x on the manifold considered. A case study of the relation between ℓ and k in a simple situation can be found in [184].
Since \({\bar \Gamma _k}\left[ g \right]\) depends on the choice of the modecutof scheme so will the solutions of Equation (4.26), and hence the resolving power ℓ(k; x). It can thus not be identified with the resolving power of an actual experimental set up, but is only meant to provide an order of magnitude estimate. The scheme independence of the resolution which can be achieved in an actual experimental set up would in this picture arise because the scheme dependence in the trajectory cancels against that in the ℓ versus k relation.
This concludes our presentation of the effective average action formalism for gravity. In the next Section 4.3 we will use the FRGE for Γ_{k} as a tool to gain insight into the gravitational renormalization flow.
4.3 Truncated flow equations
Approximate computations of the effective average action can be done in a variety of ways: by perturbation theory, by saddle point approximations of the functional integral, or by looking for approximate solutions of the FRGE. A nonperturbative method of the latter type consists in truncating the underlying functional space. Using an ansatz for Γ_{k} where kindependent local or nonlocal invariants are multiplied by running parameters, the FRGE (4.19) can eventually be converted into a system of ordinary differential equations for these parameters. In this section we outline how the conversion is done in principle.
A still very general truncated functional space consists of ‘all’ background invariant functionals \({\Gamma _k}\left[ {g,\bar g,\sigma ,\bar \sigma} \right]\) which neglect the evolution of the ghost action. The corresponding ansatz reads [179]
To simplify the notation we wrote g_{αβ} for 〈g_{αβ}〉 in the argument of the effective actions as before. In Equation (4.29) we extracted the classical S_{gf} and S_{gh} from Γ_{k}. The remaining functional depends on both g_{αβ} and ḡ_{αβ}. It is further decomposed as \({\bar \Gamma _k} + {\hat \Gamma _k}\) where \({\bar \Gamma _k}\) is defined in Equation (4.9) and \({\hat {\Gamma} _k}\) contains the deviations for ḡ ≠ g. Hence, by definition, \({\hat \Gamma _k}\left[ {g,g} \right] = 0\), and \({\hat \Gamma _k}\) can be viewed as a quantum correction to the gauge fixing term which vanishes for ḡ = g, too. The ansatz (4.29) satisfies the initial condition (4.21) if
Inserting the ansatz (4.29) into the exact form of the RG equation one obtains an evolution equation on the truncated space of Γ[g, ḡ]’s:
This equation involves
and \(\Gamma _k^{(2)}\), the Hessian of Γ_{k} [g, ḡ] with respect to g_{αβ} at fixed ḡ_{αβ}.
The truncation ansatz (4.29) is still too general for practical calculations to be easily possible. Computations simplify considerably with the choice \({\hat \Gamma _k} = ({Z_{Nk}}  1){S_{{\rm{df}}}}\) and a local curvature polynomial for \({\bar \Gamma _k}\left[ g \right]\). The first specialization includes in \({\hat \Gamma _k}\) only the wave function renormalization and gives
Here \({Q_a} = {Q_a}\left[ {\bar g,\bar f} \right]\) is given by Equation (4.10) with \({\bar f_{\alpha \beta}}: = {g_{\alpha \beta}}  {\bar g_{\alpha \beta}}\) replacing f_{αβ}; it vanishes at g = ḡ.
For \({\bar \Gamma _k}\left[ g \right]\) two choices of local curvature polynomials have been considered in detail
The truncation (4.34) will be called the EinsteinHilbert truncation. It retains only the terms already present in the classical action, with kdependent coefficients, though. It is the one where the RG flow has been originally found in [179]. The parameter α in Equation (4.33) is kept constant (α = 1 specifically; see the discussion below for generalizations) so that in this case the truncation subspace is twodimensional: The ansatz (4.33, 4.34) contains two free functions of the scale, the running cosmological constant \({{\bar \lambda}_k}\) and Z_{Nk} or, equivalently, the running Newton constant g_{N}(k) = (2κ^{2}Z_{Nk})^{−1}. Here κ^{2} is a scale independent constant related to the fixed Newton constant G in Section 1.5 by κ = (32πG)^{−1/2}.
The truncation (4.35) will be called the R^{2}truncation. It likewise keeps the gauge fixing and ghost sector classical as in Equation (4.29) but includes a local curvature squared term in \({\bar \Gamma _k}\). In this case the truncated theory space is threedimensional. Its natural (dimensionless) coordinates are (g, λ, ν), where
Even though Equation (4.35) contains only one additional invariant, the derivation of the corresponding differential equations is far more complicated than in the EinsteinHilbert case. We shall summarize the results obtained with Equation (4.35) [133, 131, 132] in Section 4.4.
We should mention that apart from familiarity and the retroactive justification through the results described later on, there is no structural reason to single out the truncations (4.34, 4.35). Even the truncated coarse graining flow in Equation (4.31) will generate all sorts of terms in \({{\bar \Gamma}_k}\left[ g \right]\), the only constraint comes from general covariance. Both local and nonlocal terms are induced. The local invariants contain monomials built from curvature tensors and their covariant derivatives, with any number of tensors and derivatives and of all possible index structures. The form of typical nonlocal terms can be motivated from a perturbative computation of Γ_{k}; an example is \(\int {{d^4}x\sqrt g {R_{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}}\ln ( {\nabla ^2}){R^{\alpha \beta \gamma \delta}}}\). Since Γ_{k} approaches the ordinary effective action Γ for k → 0 it is clear that such terms must generated by the flow since they are known to be present in Γ. For an investigation of the nonultraviolet properties of the theory, the inclusion of such terms is very desirable but it is still beyond the calculational state of the art (see however [180]).
The main technical complication comes from evaluating the functional trace on the righthandside of the flow equation (4.31) to the extent that one can match the terms against those occuring on the lefthandside. We shall now illustrate this procedure and its difficulties in the case of the EinsteinHilbert truncation (4.34) in more detail.
Upon inserting the ansatz (4.33) into the partially truncated flow equation (4.31) it should eventually give rise to a system of two ordinary differential equations for Z_{Nk} and \({{\bar \lambda}_k}\). Even in this simple case their derivation is rather technical, so we shall focus on matters of principle here. In order to find k∂_{k}Z_{Nk} and \(k{\partial _k}{{\bar \lambda}_k}\) it is sufficient to consider (4.31) for g_{αβ} = ḡ_{αβ}. In this case the lefthandside of the flow equation becomes \(2{k^2}\int {dx} \sqrt g \left[ { R(g)k{\partial _k}{Z_{Nk}} + 2k{\partial _k}({Z_{Nk}}{{\bar \lambda}_k})} \right]\). The righthandside contains the functional derivatives of Γ^{(2)}; in their evaluation one must keep in mind that the identification g_{αβ} = ḡ_{αβ} can be used only after the differentiation has been performed at fixed ḡ_{αβ}. Upon evaluation of the functional trace the righthandside should then admit an expansion in terms of invariants P_{α}[g], among them \(\int {\sqrt g}\) and \(\int {\sqrt g} R(g)\). The projected flow equations are obtained by extracting the kdependent coefficients of these two terms and discarding all others. Equating the result to the lefthandside and comparing the coefficients of \(\int {\sqrt g}\) and \(\int {\sqrt g} R\), the desired pair of coupled differential equations for Z_{Nk} and \({\bar \lambda _k}\) is obtained.
In principle the isolation of the relevant coefficients in the functional trace on the righthandside can be done without ever considering any specific metric g_{αβ}